WO2013149185A1 - Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof - Google Patents

Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2013149185A1
WO2013149185A1 PCT/US2013/034672 US2013034672W WO2013149185A1 WO 2013149185 A1 WO2013149185 A1 WO 2013149185A1 US 2013034672 W US2013034672 W US 2013034672W WO 2013149185 A1 WO2013149185 A1 WO 2013149185A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
optionally substituted
formula
alkyl
derivatives
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2013/034672
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Iontcho Radoslavov Vlahov
Hari Krishna R SANTHAPURAM
Paul Joseph Kleindl
Christopher Paul Leamon
Fei You
Original Assignee
Endocyte, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Endocyte, Inc. filed Critical Endocyte, Inc.
Priority to CA2868494A priority Critical patent/CA2868494A1/en
Priority to JP2015503659A priority patent/JP2015518473A/en
Priority to US14/388,311 priority patent/US9505747B2/en
Priority to EP13770372.4A priority patent/EP2831059B1/en
Publication of WO2013149185A1 publication Critical patent/WO2013149185A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C241/00—Preparation of compounds containing chains of nitrogen atoms singly-bound to each other, e.g. hydrazines, triazanes
    • C07C241/02—Preparation of hydrazines
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/62—Oxygen or sulfur atoms
    • C07D213/70—Sulfur atoms
    • C07D213/71—Sulfur atoms to which a second hetero atom is attached
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/72—Nitrogen atoms
    • C07D213/76—Nitrogen atoms to which a second hetero atom is attached
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D277/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings
    • C07D277/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D277/20—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D277/32—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D277/56—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F7/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 4 or 14 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F7/02—Silicon compounds
    • C07F7/08—Compounds having one or more C—Si linkages
    • C07F7/18—Compounds having one or more C—Si linkages as well as one or more C—O—Si linkages
    • C07F7/1804—Compounds having Si-O-C linkages
    • C07F7/1872—Preparation; Treatments not provided for in C07F7/20
    • C07F7/188—Preparation; Treatments not provided for in C07F7/20 by reactions involving the formation of Si-O linkages
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F7/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 4 or 14 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F7/02—Silicon compounds
    • C07F7/08—Compounds having one or more C—Si linkages
    • C07F7/18—Compounds having one or more C—Si linkages as well as one or more C—O—Si linkages
    • C07F7/1804—Compounds having Si-O-C linkages
    • C07F7/1872—Preparation; Treatments not provided for in C07F7/20
    • C07F7/1892—Preparation; Treatments not provided for in C07F7/20 by reactions not provided for in C07F7/1876 - C07F7/1888
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/02—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing at least one abnormal peptide link
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K7/00—Peptides having 5 to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K7/02—Linear peptides containing at least one abnormal peptide link

Definitions

  • the invention described herein pertains to processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives, conjugates of tubulysins, and intermediates therefore.
  • the tubulysins are members of a new class of natural products isolated from myxobacterial species (F. Sasse, et al., /. Antibiot. 2000, 53, 879-885). As cytoskeleton interacting agents, the tubulysins are mitotic poisons that inhibit tubulin polymerization and lead to cell cycle arrest and apoptosis (H. Steinmetz, et al., Chem. Int. Ed. 2004, 43, 4888- 4892; M. Khalil, et al., ChemBioChem. 2006, 7, 678-683;G. Kaur, et al., Biochem. J. 2006, 396, 235-242).
  • Tubulysins are extremely potent cytotoxic molecules, and exceed the cell growth inhibition of many other clinically relevant traditional chemotherapeutics, including epothilones, paclitaxel, and vinblastine. Furthermore, they are potent against multidrug resistant cell lines (A. Domling, et al., Mol. Diversity 2005, 9, 141-147). These compounds show high cytotoxicity tested against a panel of cancer cell lines with IC 50 values in the low picomolar range; thus, they are of interest as potential anticancer therapeutics. However, tubulysins have been reported to exhibit a narrow, or in some cases nonexistent, therapeutic window such that disease treatment with tubulysins is hampered by toxicity and other unwanted side effects.
  • tubulysins have been conjugated with targeting agents to improve their therapeutic window.
  • R A OH
  • tubulysin derivatives tubulysin analogs, and other tubulysin conjugate intermediates that are useful for preparing such targeted conjugates.
  • Tubulysin derivatives useful for preparing vitamin receptor binding tubulysin conjugates are described herein.
  • tubulysin linker derivatives include linear tetrapeptoid backbones, including illustrative compounds having the following formula
  • Ari is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • Ar 2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • L is selected from the group consisting of
  • p is an integer from about 1 to about 3
  • m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
  • R A , R B , and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R A , R B , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • R AT represents hydrogen, or 1 to 4 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of amino or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and heteroarylheteroalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted;
  • X is hydrogen; or X is alkyl or alkenyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or X is R 16 C(0)CH(R 17 )CH 2 ; where R 17 is C(0)R 16 , C(0)OR 16 , or CN; where R 16 is independently in each instance alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or X is 18
  • R is alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, or
  • heteroarylalkyl each of which is optionally substituted, or 18
  • R is acyl, sulfonyl, or phosphonic acid or a derivative thereof
  • R 4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • R5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • R AT represents hydrogen, or 1 to 4 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of amino or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and heteroarylheteroalkyl; and n is 1, 2, 3, or 4.
  • X is Y-CH 2 , where Y is R 2 C(0)0 or R 12 0; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • tubulysin linker derivative has formula
  • tubulysin linker derivative has formula T2
  • Ar is optionally substituted aryl.
  • Ar is optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • tubulysins described herein are more particularly comprised of one or more non-naturally occurring or hydrophobic amino acid segments, such as N-methyl pipecolic acid (Mep), isoleucine (He),
  • tubuvaline an analog of tyrosine (Tup, an analog of phenylalanine) and analogs and derivative of each of the foregoing.
  • Derivatives and analogs of tubuvaline include compounds of the followin formula,
  • R 4 , R5 and R 6 are as described in any of the embodiments described herein.
  • tubutyrosine or tubuphenylalanine include compounds having formula, wherein R 3 and Ar are as described in any of the embodiment described herein.
  • a common feature in the molecular architecture of potent natural occurring tubulysins is the acid and/or base sensitive N-acyloxymethyl substituent (or a /V,O-acetal of formaldehyde) represented by R 2 C0 2 CH 2 in the formula (Tl).
  • the compounds described herein are NHNH-C(0)0-L-
  • tubulysin derivatives described herein are those havin formula 1.
  • tubulysins conjugated to vitamin receptor binding moieties for targeted and/or selective delivery to cell populations expressing, overexpressing or selectively expressing cell surface vitamin receptors necessitates further modification of the highly toxic tubulysins.
  • Described herein are improved processes for making natural tubulysins analogs or derivatives, which are useful for preparing vitamin receptor binding tubulysin conjugates including compounds of formula (T) and formula (1).
  • Vitamin receptor binding conjugates of tubulysins are described in U.S. Patent Publication 2010/0048490, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • processes for derivatives or analogs of natural tubulysins including compounds of formula (T).
  • vitamin receptor binding conjugates of tubulysins are described. The processes include one or more steps described herein.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula B, wherein R5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as each being independently selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and Rg is C1-C6 n-alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula A with a silylating agent, such as triethylsilyl chloride, and a base such as imidazole in an aprotic solvent.
  • a silylating agent such as triethylsilyl chloride
  • R5 and R 6 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula C, wherein R5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as each being independently selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; Rg is C1-C6 n-alkyl; and R 2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula B with a base and a compound of the formula C1CH 2 0C(0)R 2 in an aprotic solvent at a temperature below ambient temperature, such as in the range from about -78°C to about 0°C; wherein the molar ratio of the compound of the formula C1CH 2 0C(0)R 2 to the compound of formula B is from about 1 to about 1.5.
  • R 2 , R 5 and R 6 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula D, wherein R 5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; Rg is Cl- C6 n-alkyl; R 2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the steps of
  • R 2 , R 5 , R 6 , and R 7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula F, wherein R 5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the rocess comprises the step of treating compound D with a hydrolase enzyme.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula F, wherein R 5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating compound D with a trialkyltin hydroxide (e.g. trimethyltin hydroxide).
  • R 2 , R5, R 6 , and R 7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula AF, wherein R5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound D with an alcohol, R 12 OH, where R 12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a transesterification catalyst.
  • the transesterification catalyst is trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
  • the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of
  • transesterification catalyst is( R 13 ) 2 SnO.
  • R 13 include methyl, n-butyl. n-octyl, phenyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p-MeO phenyl, phenethyl, and benzyl.
  • R5, R 6 , R 12 , and R 7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a transesterification product of each of the compounds of formula A and/or B, wherein R5, R 6 , and R 8 are as described in the various embodiments herein, and where RT 2 is different from Rg; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound B with an alcohol, R 12 OH, where R 12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a transesterification catalyst.
  • the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of
  • R 13 8 Sn 4 0 2 (NCS)4, (Ri 3 ) 2 Sn(OAc) 2 , (Ri 3 ) 2 SnO, (R 13 ) 2 SnCl 2 , (Ri 3 ) 2 SnS, (R 13 ) 3 SnOH, and (R 13 ) 3 SnOSn(R 13 ) 3 , where R 13 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted. In another embodiment, the
  • transesterification catalyst is (R 1 ) 2 SnO.
  • R 1 include methyl, n-butyl. n-octyl phenyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p-MeO phenyl, phenethyl, and benzyl.
  • R 5 , R 6 , and R 12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula G, wherein R 5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating the silyl ether of compound F with a non- basic fluoride containing reagent.
  • R 2 , R5, R 6 , and R 7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula AG, wherein R5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound F with an alcohol, R 12 OH, where R 12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a transesterification catalyst.
  • the transesterification catalyst is trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
  • the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of
  • R 1 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • transesterification catalyst is ( R 13 ) 2 SnO.
  • R 13 is methyl, n-butyl. n- octyl, henyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p-MeO phenyl, phenethyl,and benzyl.
  • R 2 , R5, R 6 , R 7 , and R 12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula BG, wherein R5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 12 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound AF with a metal hydroxide or carbonate.
  • Illustrative examples of a metal hydroxide or carbonate include LiOH, Li 2 C0 3 , NaOH, Na 2 C0 3 , KOH, K 2 C0 3 , Ca(OH) 2 , CaC0 3 , M OH) 2 , MgC0 3 , and the like.
  • R5, R 6 , R 7 , and R 12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process is described for preparing a compound of formula H, wherein R 5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 and R 4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula G with an acylating agent of formula R C(0)X 2 , where X 2 is a leaving group.
  • R 2 , R ⁇ , R 5 , R 6 , and R 7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula AH, wherein R5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 and R 4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 12 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula BG with an acylating agent of formula R 4 C(0)X 2 , where X 2 is a leavin group.
  • R 4 , R5, R 6 , and R 7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a tubulysin linker derivative of formula (Tl), wherein Ar is optionally substituted aryl; Ar 2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl; L is selected from the group consisting of -(CR 2 ) P CR A R B -,
  • p is an integer from about 1 to about 3
  • m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
  • R A , R B , and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R A , R B , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • RA T represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
  • Ri is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or a pro-drug forming group
  • R 5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • R 2 and R 4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl
  • R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • the process comprises the step of forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula H; and reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I to ive a compound of the formula T.
  • Ar 1; Ar 2 , Ri, R 2 , R4, R5, R6, and R 7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a tubulysin linker derivative of formula (T2), wherein ⁇ is optionally substituted aryl; Ar 2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl; L is selected from the group consisting of
  • R a , R b , and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R a , R b , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • R AT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
  • heteroarylheteroalkyl nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
  • Ri is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or a pro-drug forming group;
  • R5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl;
  • R 2 and R 4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound T, with an alcohol, R 12 OH, where R 12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a transesterification catalyst.
  • the transesterification catalyst is trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
  • the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of (Ri 3 ) 8 Sn 4 0 2 (NCS) 4 , (Ri 3 ) 2 Sn(OAc) 2 , (Ri 3 ) 2 SnO, (Ri 3 ) 2 SnCl 2 , (Ri 3 ) 2 SnS, (Ri 3 ) 3 SnOH, and (R 13 ) 3 SnOSn(R 13 ) 3 , where R 13 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of (Ri 3 ) 8 Sn 4 0 2 (NCS) 4 , (Ri 3 ) 2 Sn(OAc) 2 , (Ri 3 ) 2 SnO, (Ri 3 ) 2 SnCl 2 , (R
  • transesterification catalyst is ( R 1 ) 2 SnO.
  • R 1 is methyl, n-butyl. n- octyl, phenyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p-MeO phenyl, phenethyl,and benzyl.
  • Ar 1 ; Ar 2 , Ri, R 2 , R4, R5, R 6 , R7, and R 12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a tubulysin linker derivative of formula (T2), wherein ⁇ is optionally substituted aryl; Ar 2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl; L is selected from the group consisting of
  • p is an integer from about 1 to about 3
  • m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
  • R a , R b , and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R a , R b , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • RA T represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
  • heteroarylheteroalkyl nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
  • Ri is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or a pro-drug forming group;
  • R5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl;
  • R 2 and R 4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and
  • R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
  • the process comprises the step of forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula AH; and reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I to ive a compound of the formula AT.
  • Ar 1; Ar 2 , R 1; R 12 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , and R 7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • acyloxymethyl group (R2-C(0)-CH2) present on any of compounds C, D, F, G, H, and Tl may be converted into the corresponding ether group (Ri 2-O-CH2), or other group (X or Y-CH2) using the process of contacting the compound with trifluoroacetic acid (TFA), as described herein, and also as described in WO
  • each of XC, XD, XF, XG, and XH can be used in the processes described herein in place of each of C, D, F, G, and H, respectively, to prepare the corresponding compound having an ether group (R 2-O-CH2), or other group (X).
  • each of YC, YD, YF, YG, and YH can be used in the processes described herein in place of each of C, D, F, G, and H, respectively, to prepare the corresponding compound having an ether group (R 2-O-CH2), or other group (Y-CH2).
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula B, wherein R5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and Rg is C1-C6 n-alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula A with triethylsilyl chloride and imidazole in an a rotic solvent.
  • TESC1 the less reactive reagent TESC1 may be used. It has also been surprisingly discovered herein that although TESC1 is a less reactive reagent, it may nonetheless be used in nearly stoichiometric amounts in the processes described herein. It is appreciated herein that the use of the less reactive TESCl may also be advantageous when the process is performed on larger scales, where higher reactivity reagents may represent a safety issue. It has also been discovered that the use of TESCl in nearly stoichiometric amounts renders the chromatographic purification step unnecessary. In an alternative of the embodiment, the process is performed without subsequent purification.
  • R5 is isopropyl.
  • R 6 is sec -butyl.
  • Rg is methyl.
  • the silyl ether is TES.
  • the compound 4 is not purified by
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula C, wherein R 5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; Rg is C1-C6 n-alkyl; and R 2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula B with from about 1 equivalent to about 1.5 equivalent of base and from about 1 equivalent to about 1.5 equivalent of a compound of the formula C1CH 2 0C(0)R 2 in an aprotic solvent at a temperature from about -78°C to about 0°C.
  • the ether analog of C can be used to prepare the tubulysins, the tubulysin conjugates, and the tubulysin linker compounds described herein.
  • the process of any one of the preceding embodiments is described wherein about 1 equivalent to about 1.3 equivalent of a compound of the formula C1CH 2 0C(0)R 2 is used. In another illustrative example, the process of any one of the preceding embodiments is described, wherein about 1.2 equivalent of a compound of the formula C1CH 2 0C(0)R 2 is used. In another illustrative example, the process of any one of the preceding embodiments is described wherein R 2 is n-propyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R 2 is
  • N,0-acetal 5 a process for preparing the N,0-acetal 5 is described.
  • compound 2 is treated with 1.1 equivalent of potassium hexamethyldisilazane (KHMDS) and 1.2 equivalent of chloromethyl butanoate in a nonprotic solvent at about -45°C.
  • KHMDS potassium hexamethyldisilazane
  • chloromethyl butanoate in a nonprotic solvent at about -45°C.
  • the product formed by any of the preceding examples may be used without chromatographic purificatio
  • the ether analogs of compound 5 can also be used to prepare the tubuly tubulysin linker compounds
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula D, wherein R5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and cycloalkyl; R 8 is C1-C6 n-alkyl; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the steps of
  • a mixture of compound 5 and the pentafluorophenyl ester of D-N-methyl-pipecolic acid is reduced using H 2 and a palladium-on-charcoal catalyst (Pd/C) to yield compound 6.
  • Pd/C palladium-on-charcoal catalyst
  • n is 3.
  • R 7 is methyl.
  • the ether analogs of 5 and 6 can be used to prepare the tubulysins, tubulysin conjugates, and tubulysin linker compounds described herein. It has been previously reported that removal of the protecting group from the secondary hydroxyl group leads to an inseparable mixture of the desired product 5a and a cyclic O,N-acetal side-product, 5b, as shown in the following scheme.
  • iso-7a results from rearrangement of the butyrate group from the N-hydrox methyl group to the secondary hydroxyl group, as shown below.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula AF, wherein R 5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound D with an alcohol, R 12 OH, where R 12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a transesterification catalyst.
  • the transesterification catalyst is trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
  • the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of
  • the catalyst is (R 13 ) 2 SnO.
  • R 13 is methyl, n-butyl, n-octyl, phenyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p- MeO phen l, phenethyl,and benzyl.
  • R 5 , R 6 , Ri 2 , and R 7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula F, wherein R5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating compound D with a h drolase enzyme.
  • the preceding process wherein the treating step comprises adding a solution of compound D in a water miscible solvent to a buffered solution containing the hydrolase enzyme at a rate which minimizes precipitation of the ester.
  • the ester is added over a period of from about 24 hours to about 100 hours.
  • the ester is added over a period of from about 48 hours to about 100 hours.
  • Rg is methyl.
  • the embodiment of any one of the preceding embodiments wherein the hydrolase enzyme is an esterase is described.
  • the embodiment of any of the preceding embodiments wherein the esterase is a pig liver esterase is described.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula F, wherein R5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating compound D with a trialkyltin hydroxide.
  • the trialkyltin hydroxide is trimethyltin hydroxide.
  • a solution of compound 4 in dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) is added over a period of 90 hours, to a buffered solution of pig liver esterase.
  • the buffer is a phosphate buffer.
  • the solution of the enzyme has a pH of 6.5 to 8.5.
  • the solution of the enzyme has a pH of 7.4 to 7.8. It is appreciated that the buffering material used can be any buffer compatible with the hydrolase enzyme used to remove the ester.
  • Tripeptide methyl ester 6 (reported in an earlier patent application [1]) was treated with trimethyltin hydroxide to yield corresponding acid 7.
  • the triethylsilyl group was removed by treatment with hydrogen flouride-triethyl amine complex, and acetylated, resulting in acety -tripeptide acid 8.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula G, wherein R 5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating the silyl ether of compound F with a non-basic fluoride reagent. It has been discovered herein that use of basic conditions can lead to the production of a by-product arising from the rearrangement of the ester roup to give compound G'.
  • compound 7 is treated with Et N*3HF to cleave the TES-ether in the preparation of the corresponding alcohol 6'.
  • Et N*3HF a non-basic fluoride reagent to cleave the silyl ether of compounds F
  • other non-basic fluoride reagents to cleave the silyl ether of compounds F may be used in the methods and processes described herein, including but not limited to pyridine » HF, and the like to cleave the TES-ether.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula AG, wherein R5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound F with an alcohol, R 12 OH, where R 12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a transesterification catalyst.
  • the transesterification catalyst is trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
  • the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of
  • R 1 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • the catalyst is (R 13 ) 2 SnO.
  • R 13 are methyl, n-butyl. n-octyl, phenyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p- MeO henyl, phenethyl,and benzyl.
  • R 2 , R 5 , R 6 , R7, and R 12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula BG, wherein R 5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 12 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound AF with a metal hydroxide or carbonate.
  • Illustrative examples of a metal hydroxide or carbonate include LiOH, Li 2 C0 3 , NaOH, Na 2 C0 3 , KOH, K 2 C0 3 , Ca(OH) 2 , CaC0 3 , M OH) 2 , MgC0 3 , and the like.
  • R5, R 6 , R 7 , and R 12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula H, wherein R 5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 and R 4 are independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula G with an acylating agent of formula R 4 C(0)X 2 , where X 2 is a leaving group. It is appreciated that the resulting product may contain varying amounts of the mixed anhydride of compound H and R 4 C0 2 H.
  • the process described in the preceding embodiment further comprises the step of treating the reaction product with water to prepare H, free of or substantially free of anhydride.
  • the process of the preceding embodiments wherein X 2 is R 4 C0 2 is described.
  • the process of any one of the preceding embodiments wherein R 4 is C1-C4 alkyl is described.
  • R 4 is methyl.
  • the process of any one of the preceding embodiments wherein R 6 is sec -butyl is described.
  • the process of any one of the preceding embodiments wherein R 7 is methyl is described.
  • the process of any one of the preceding embodiments wherein R5 is iso- pro l is described.
  • compound 6' is treated with acetic anhydride in pyridine. It has been discovered herein that shortening the time for this step of the process improves the yield of compound H by limiting the amount of the previously undescribed alternative acylation side products, such as formula 7a that are formed. It is appreciated that the resulting product may contain varying amounts of the mixed anhydride of 8 and acetic acid.
  • treatment of the reaction product resulting from the preceding step with water in dioxane yields compound 8, free of or substantially free of anhydride. It is to be understood that other solvents can be substituted for dioxane in the hydrolysis of the intermediate mixed anh dride. Alternatively, the step may be performed without solvent.
  • a process for preparing a compound of formula AH, wherein R5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 2 and R 4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 12 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula BG with an acylating agent of formula R 4 C(0)X 2 , where X 2 is a leavin group.
  • R 4 , R5, R 6 , and R 7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • mixed carbonate 11 was prepared from 4- nitropyridyldisulfide ethanol 12 and 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate as shown.
  • Boc-Tut-hydrazide 13 was prepared from corresponding acid 10 and coupled with mixed carbonate 11 to yield activated Boc-Tut fragment 14.
  • ⁇ is optionally substituted aryl
  • Ar 2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • L is selected from the group consisting of
  • p is an integer from about 1 to about 3
  • m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
  • R A , R B , and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R A , R B , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • RA T represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
  • heteroarylheteroalkyl nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
  • R 5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl;
  • R 2 and R 4 are independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and
  • R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
  • compound H is treated with an excess amount of active ester forming agent and pentafluorophenol to form the pentafluorophenol ester of compound H, followed by removal of the excess active ester forming agent prior to the addition of compound I.
  • ⁇ is phenyl.
  • ⁇ is substituted phenyl.
  • Ar is 4-substituted phenyl.
  • R A - substituted phenyl is R A - substituted phenyl.
  • Ari is 4-hydroxyphenyl, or a hydroxyl protected form thereof.
  • Ar 2 is substituted pyridyl.
  • Ar 2 is substituted 2-pyridyl.
  • Ar 2 is 3-nitro-2-pyridyl.
  • R 3 is methyl.
  • compound 8 is treated with an excess amount of a polymeric version of a carbodiimide and pentafluorophenol to form the pentafluorophenyl ester of 8, the polymeric carbodiimide is removed by filtration; and compound 9 is added to the solution to yield tubulysin B linker derivative 2.
  • the ether analog of compound 8 can be converted to the ether analog of compound 2, via the ether analog of compound 15, where R is allyl, or CH 2 (CH 2 ) n CH 3 , and n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
  • a process for preparing a tubulysin linker derivative of formula (T2), wherein Ar is optionally substituted aryl; Ar 2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl; L is selected from the group consisting of
  • p is an integer from about 1 to about 3
  • m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
  • Ra, Rb, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R a , R b , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • R AT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
  • heteroarylheteroalkyl nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
  • Ri is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or a pro-drug forming group;
  • R 5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl;
  • R 2 and R 4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and
  • R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
  • the process comprises the step of contacting compound T, with an alcohol, R 12 OH, where R 12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a
  • the transesterification catalyst is trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
  • the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of (R 13 ) 8 Sn 4 0 2 (NCS) 4 , (R 13 ) 2 Sn(OAc) 2 , (Ri 3 ) 2 SnO, (R 13 ) 2 SnCl 2 , (Ri 3 ) 2 SnS, (R 13 ) 3 SnOH, and (R 13 ) 3 SnOSn(R 1 ) , where R 1 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • the catalyst is (R 13 ) 2 SnO.
  • R 13 are methyl, n-butyl, n-octyl, phenyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p-MeO-phenyl, phenethyl,and benzyl. It is to be understood that Ar 1; Ar 2 , R 1; R 2 , R ⁇ , R5, R 6 , R and R 12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
  • a process for preparing a tubulysin linker derivative of formula (T2), wherein ⁇ is optionally substituted aryl; Ar 2 is optionally substituted heteroaryl; L is selected from the group consisting of
  • p is an integer from about 1 to about 3
  • m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
  • Ra, Rb, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R a , R b , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • RA T represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
  • heteroarylheteroalkyl nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
  • Ri is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or a pro-drug forming group;
  • R5 and R 6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl;
  • R 2 and R 4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and
  • R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
  • the process comprises the step of forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula AH; and reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I to ive a compound of the formula AT.
  • Ar 1 ; Ar 2 , R 1 ; R 12 , R 3 , R*, R 5 , R6, and R 7 may each include
  • a compound having formula D wherein the compound is free of or substantially free of a compound having formula C- 1 is described, where in R 2 , R 5 , R 6 , R7, and Rg are as described in any of the embodiments described herein. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that compounds C- 1 are formed from the corresponding compounds C via an acyl transfer.
  • compound 4 free of or substantially free of compound 8a and/or compound iso-6 is described.
  • an optically pure form of compound 6 is formed.
  • Rg are as described in the any of the embodiments described herein.
  • compound 6' is described, wherein compound 6' is free of or substantially free of the isomer of G' shown below
  • compound 8 is described, wherein compound 8 is free of or substantially free of compound 8b is described
  • R a and R b are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R a , R b , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring.
  • R a and R b are hydrogen.
  • R a and R b are hydrogen.
  • R a and R b are hydrogen and p is 1.
  • a compound H is described wherein R 4 is Me and R 2 , R 5 , R 6 , and R 7 are as described in any of the embodiments described herein; and the compound H is free of or substantially free of the compound H wherein R 4 and R 2 are both Me.
  • R5 is isopropyl
  • R 6 is sec-butyl
  • R 8 is methyl
  • n 3.
  • R 7 is methyl
  • R 8 is methyl
  • R 4 is methyl.
  • Ar is phenyl.
  • ⁇ is substituted phenyl.
  • Ar is 4-substituted phenyl.
  • An is RA- substituted phenyl.
  • Ari is 4-hydroxyphenyl, or a hydroxyl protected form thereof.
  • R 3 is methyl
  • Ari is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • Ar 2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • L is selected from the group consisting of
  • p is an integer from about 1 to about 3
  • m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
  • R A , R B , and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R A , R B , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • RA T represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
  • X is hydrogen; or X is alkyl or alkenyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or X is R 16 C(0)CH(R 17 )CH 2 ; where R 17 is C(0)R 16 , C(0)OR 16 , or CN; where R 16 is independently in each instance alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or X is CH 2 QR 18 ; where Q is N, O, or
  • R 18 is alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, or
  • heteroarylalkyl each of which is optionally substituted, or R 18 is acyl, sulfonyl, or phosphonic acid or a derivative thereof;
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • R 4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl
  • R 5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • R 12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted;
  • n 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • Ari is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • Ar 2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • L is selected from the group consisting of
  • R A , R B , and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R A , R B , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • RA T represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
  • heteroarylheteroalkyl nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
  • Y is acyloxy or R 12 0;
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • R 4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl
  • R 5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • R 12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted;
  • n 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • Ari is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • Ar 2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • L is selected from the group consisting of -(CR 2 ) P CR a R b , and
  • p is an integer from about 1 to about 3
  • m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and indicates the points of attachment
  • R a , R b , and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R a , R b , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • R AT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
  • heteroarylheteroalkyl nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • R 4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl
  • R5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • n 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • Ari is optionally substituted aryl
  • Ar 2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • L is selected from the group consisting of -(CR 2 ) P CR A R B , and
  • p is an integer from about 1 to about 3
  • m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
  • R A , R B , and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R A , R B , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • R AT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
  • heteroarylheteroalkyl nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted;
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • R 4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl
  • R 5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • n 1 , 2, 3, or 4;
  • transesterification reagent selected from TFA or (R 13 )gSn 4 0 2 (NCS)4, (Ri3) 2 Sn(OAc) 2 , (Ri 3 ) 2 SnO, (Ri 3 ) 2 SnCl 2 , (Ri 3 ) 2 SnS, (Ri 3 ) 3 SnOH, or (R 13 ) 3 SnOSn(R 13 ) 3 , where R 13 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted
  • Ari is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • Ar 2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • L is selected from the group consisting of
  • p is an integer from about 1 to about 3
  • m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
  • R A , R B , and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R A , R B , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • RA T represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • R9 is hydrogen or an amine protecting group.
  • Ari is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • Ar 2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • L is selected from the group consisting of
  • R A , R B , and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R A , R B , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • R AT represents hydrogen, or 1 to 4 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of amino or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and heteroarylheteroalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted;
  • Y is R 2 C(0)0 or R 12 0;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • R5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • R 12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted;
  • R AT represents hydrogen, or 1 to 4 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of amino or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and heteroarylheteroalkyl; and n is 1, 2, 3, or 4.
  • R 2 is n-butyl
  • R is methyl
  • R 4 is methyl
  • R 5 is sec -butyl
  • R 7 is C1-C6 alkyl. 21. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
  • R 7 is methyl
  • Ar 2 is substituted pyridyl.
  • transesterification catalyst is selected from (R 13 ) 8 Sn 4 0 2 (NCS)4, (R 13 ) 2 Sn(OAc) 2 , (R 1 ) 2 SnO, (R 13 ) 2 SnCl 2 , (R 13 ) 2 SnS, (R 13 ) 3 SnOH, and (R 13 ) 3 SnOSn(R 13 ) 3 , where R 13 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • the alkaline salt is selected from LiOH, Li 2 C0 3 , NaOH, Na 2 C0 3 , KOH, K 2 C0 3 , Ca(OH) 2 , CaC0 3 , Mg(OH) 2 , or MgC0 3 .
  • Ar 2 is 3-nitro-2-pyridyl.
  • O-L-S is 0-(CR 2 ) P CR A R B -S.
  • R a and R b are each hydrogen.
  • R a is hydrogen and R b is methyl.
  • R a and R b are each methyl.
  • Ari is optionally substituted aryl
  • Ar 2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl
  • L is selected from the group consisting of
  • R a , R b , and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of R a , R b , and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
  • R AT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
  • heteroarylheteroalkyl nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
  • X is hydrogen or alkyl, including C 1-6 alkyl and C 1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, including C 2 _ 6 alkenyl and C 2 _ 4 alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or
  • heteroarylalkyl each of which is optionally substituted; or CH 2 QR 9 ; where Q is NH, O, or S; or; and R 9 is alkyl, including Ci_6 alkyl and C 1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, including C 2 _ 6 alkenyl and C 2 _ 4 alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or R 9 is hydrogen or C(0)R 10 , where R 10 is Q-6 alkyl, C 2 _ 6 alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or R 9 is C(0)R 20 ,
  • R 20 is independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of H, alkyl, including C 1-6 alkyl and C 1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, including C 2 _ 6 alkenyl and C2-4 alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or R 20 is a metal cation;
  • R 3 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • R 4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl
  • R5 and R 6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 7 is optionally substituted alkyl
  • n 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • X is CH 2 QR 9A ; where Q is NH, O, or S; and R 9A is alkyl, including C 1-6 alkyl and C 1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, including C 2 -6 alkenyl and C 2 - 4 alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or R 9A is H or C(0)R 10 , where R 10 is C 1-6 alkyl, C 2 -6 alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • heteroarylalkyl each of which is optionally substituted; or R 20 is a metal cation.
  • R 9B is C(0)R 20 , where R 20 is alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or arylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • one or more of the following intermediates can be used to prepare a tubulysin, tubul sin conjugate, and/or a tubulysin linker compound.
  • processes for preparing tubulysin conjugates are described herein.
  • the processes include the step of reacting compounds (2) and the corresponding tubulysins described herein that include a 3-nitropyridin-2-ylthio activating group (AT2), such as compounds of the formulae
  • the processes include acetonitrile as a reaction solvent.
  • the processes include aqueous phosphate as a reaction medium buffer. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that the use of acetonitrile as a solvent leads to a more rapid homogenous reaction solution. In addition, though without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that a more rapidly formed homogenous reaction medium may improve the yield and rate at which tubulysin conjugates described herein are formed.
  • 3-nitropyridin-2-ylthio activating groups may lead to faster reaction times.
  • the use of 3-nitropyridin-2-ylthio activating groups may provide better chromatographic separation between the product tubulysin conjugates and the by-product 3-nitropyridin-2-ylthiol compared to conventional pyridin-2-ylthio activating groups. In addition, such better chromatographic separation may allow the use of alternative purification methods.
  • tubulysin conjugates described herein may be purified by rapid pass-through chromatography methods, such as flash Ci g chromatography, BiotageTM Ci g chromatography systems, and the like. Additional methods and processes useful for performing the above processes are found in U.S. Patent Appl. Ser. No. 12/739,579, published as U.S. Application Publication No. 2010/0240701, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • tubulysin refers both collectively and individually to the naturally occurring tubulysins, and the analogs and derivatives of tubulysins. Illustrative examples of a tubulysin are shown in Table 1.
  • tubulysin linker derivatives generally refers to the compounds described herein and analogs and derivatives thereof. It is also to be understood that in each of the foregoing, any corresponding pharmaceutically acceptable salt is also included in the illustrative embodiments described herein.
  • derivatives may include prodrugs of the compounds described herein, compounds described herein that include one or more protection or protecting groups, including compounds that are used in the preparation of other compounds described herein.
  • tubulysin linker derivatives also refers to prodrug derivatives of the compounds described herein, and including prodrugs of the various analogs and derivatives thereof.
  • tubulysin linker derivatives refers to both the amorphous as well as any and all morphological forms of each of the compounds described herein.
  • tubulysin linker derivatives refers to any and all hydrates, or other solvates, of the compounds described herein.
  • the compounds described herein may contain one or more chiral centers, or may otherwise be capable of existing as multiple stereoisomers. It is to be understood that in one embodiment, the invention described herein is not limited to any particular stereochemical requirement, and that the compounds, and compositions, methods, uses, and medicaments that include them may be optically pure, or may be any of a variety of stereoisomeric mixtures, including racemic and other mixtures of enantiomers, other mixtures of diastereomers, and the like. It is also to be understood that such mixtures of stereoisomers may include a single stereochemical configuration at one or more chiral centers, while including mixtures of stereochemical configuration at one or more other chiral centers.
  • the compounds described herein may include geometric centers, such as cis, trans, (E)-, and (Z)- double bonds. It is to be understood that in another embodiment, the invention described herein is not limited to any particular geometric isomer requirement, and that the compounds, and compositions, methods, uses, and medicaments that include them may be pure, or may be any of a variety of geometric isomer mixtures. It is also to be understood that such mixtures of geometric isomers may include a single configuration at one or more double bonds, while including mixtures of geometry at one or more other double bonds.
  • aprotic solvent refers to a solvent which does not yield a proton to the solute(s) under reaction conditions.
  • nonprotic solvents are tetrahydrofuran (THF), 2,5-dimethyl-tetrahydrofuran, 2-methyl-tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydropyran, diethyl ether, t-butyl methyl ether, dimethyl formamide, N-methylpyrrolidinone (NMP), and the like. It is appreciated that mixtures of these solvents may also be used in the processes described herein.
  • an equivalent amount of a reagent refers to the theoretical amount of the reagent necessary to transform a starting material into a desired product, i.e. if 1 mole of reagent is theoretically required to transform 1 mole of the starting material into 1 mole of product, then 1 equivalent of the reagent represents 1 mole of the reagent; if X moles of reagent are theoretically required to convert 1 mole of the starting material into 1 mole of product, then 1 equivalent of reagent represents X moles of reagent.
  • active ester forming agent generally refers to any reagent or combinations of reagents that may be used to convert a carboxylic acid into an active ester.
  • active ester generally refers to a carboxylic acid ester compound wherein the divalent oxygen portion of the ester is a leaving group resulting in an ester that is activated for reacting with compounds containing functional groups, such as amines, alcohols or sulfhydryl groups.
  • functional groups such as amines, alcohols or sulfhydryl groups.
  • N-hydroxysuccinimide N-hydroxyphthalimide
  • phenols substituted with electron withdrawing groups such as but not limited to 4-nitrophenol, pentafluorophenol, ⁇ , ⁇ '-disubstituted isoureas, substituted hydroxyheteroaryls, such as but not limited to 2- pyridinols, 1-hydroxybenzotriazoles, l-hydroxy-7-aza-benzotriazoles, cyanomethanol, and the like.
  • the reaction conditions for displacing the active ester with a compound having an amino, hydroxy or thiol group are mild.
  • reaction conditions for displacing the active ester with a compound having an amino, hydroxy or thiol group are performed at ambient or below ambient temperatures.
  • the reaction conditions for displacing the active ester with a compound having an amino, hydroxy or thiol group are performed without the addition of a strong base.
  • the reaction conditions for displacing the active ester with a compound having an amino, hydroxy or thiol group are performed with the addition of a tertiary amine base, such as a tertiary amine base having a conjugate acid pKa of about 11 or less, about 10.5 or less, and the like.
  • alkyl includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched.
  • alkenyl and alkynyl includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, and includes at least one double bond or triple bond, respectively. It is to be understood that alkynyl may also include one or more double bonds. It is to be further understood that in certain embodiments, alkyl is advantageously of limited length, including Q-C ⁇ , C ⁇ -Cn, Q-Cg, C -C , and C C*.
  • alkenyl and/or alkynyl may each be advantageously of limited length, including C 2 -C 24 , C 2 -C 12 , C 2 -C8, C 2 -C 6 , and C 2 -C 4 . It is appreciated herein that shorter alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl groups may add less lipophilicity to the compound and accordingly will have different pharmacokinetic behavior.
  • Illustrative alkyl groups are, but not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, 2- pentyl, 3-pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl and the like.
  • cycloalkyl includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, where at least a portion of the chain in cyclic. It is to be understood that cycloalkylalkyl is a subset of cycloalkyl. It is to be understood that cycloalkyl may be polycyclic. Illustrative cycloalkyl include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 2-methylcyclopropyl, cyclopentyleth-2-yl, adamantyl, and the like.
  • cycloalkenyl includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, and includes at least one double bond, where at least a portion of the chain in cyclic. It is to be understood that the one or more double bonds may be in the cyclic portion of cycloalkenyl and/or the non-cyclic portion of cycloalkenyl. It is to be understood that cycloalkenylalkyl and cycloalkylalkenyl are each subsets of cycloalkenyl. It is to be understood that cycloalkyl may be polycyclic.
  • Illustrative cycloalkenyl include, but are not limited to, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexylethen-2-yl, cycloheptenylpropenyl, and the like. It is to be further understood that chain forming cycloalkyl and/or cycloalkenyl is advantageously of limited length, including C3-C 24 , C 3 -C 12 , C 3 -Cg, C 3 -C 6 , and C5-C 6 . It is appreciated herein that shorter alkyl and/or alkenyl chains forming cycloalkyl and/or cycloalkenyl, respectively, may add less lipophilicity to the compound and accordingly will have different pharmacokinetic behavior.
  • heteroalkyl includes a chain of atoms that includes both carbon and at least one heteroatom, and is optionally branched.
  • Illustrative heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In certain variations, illustrative heteroatoms also include phosphorus, and selenium.
  • cycloheteroalkyl including heterocyclyl and heterocycle, includes a chain of atoms that includes both carbon and at least one heteroatom, such as heteroalkyl, and is optionally branched, where at least a portion of the chain is cyclic.
  • Illustrative heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In certain variations, illustrative heteroatoms also include phosphorus, and selenium.
  • Illustrative cycloheteroalkyl include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl,
  • aryl includes monocyclic and polycyclic aromatic groups, including aromatic carbocyclic and aromatic heterocyclic groups, each of which may be optionally substituted.
  • carbocyclic and aromatic heterocyclic groups each of which may be optionally substituted.
  • carbocyclic groups each of which may be optionally substituted.
  • Illustrative aromatic carbocyclic groups described herein include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, and the like.
  • heteroaryl includes aromatic heterocyclic groups, each of which may be optionally substituted.
  • Illustrative aromatic heterocyclic groups include, but are not limited to, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, tetrazinyl, quinolinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, thienyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, triazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzthiazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, and the like.
  • amino includes the group NH 2 , alkylamino, and dialkylamino, where the two alkyl groups in dialkylamino may be the same or different, i.e. alkylalkylamino.
  • amino includes methylamino, ethylamino, dimethylamino, methylethylamino, and the like.
  • amino modifies or is modified by another term, such as aminoalkyl, or acylamino the above variations of the term amino are included therein.
  • aminoalkyl includes H 2 N-alkyl, methylaminoalkyl, ethylaminoalkyl, dimethylaminoalkyl, methylethylaminoalkyl, and the like.
  • acylamino includes acylmethylamino, acylethylamino, and the like.
  • amino and derivatives thereof includes amino as described herein, and alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, heteroalkylamino, heteroalkenylamino, heteroalkynylamino, cycloalkylamino, cycloalkenylamino, cycloheteroalkylamino, cycloheteroalkenylamino, arylamino, arylalkylamino,
  • amino derivative also includes urea, carbamate, and the like.
  • hydroxy and derivatives thereof includes OH, and alkyloxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, heteroalkyloxy, heteroalkenyloxy, heteroalkynyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, cycloalkenyloxy, cycloheteroalkyloxy, cycloheteroalkenyloxy, aryloxy, arylalkyloxy, arylalkenyloxy, arylalkynyloxy, acyloxy, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • hydroxy derivative also includes carbamate, and the like.
  • thio and derivatives thereof includes SH, and alkylthio, alkenylthio, alkynylthio, heteroalkylthio, heteroalkenylthio, heteroalkynylthio, cycloalkylthio, cycloalkenylthio, cycloheteroalkylthio, cycloheteroalkenylthio, arylthio, arylalkylthio, arylalkenylthio, arylalkynylthio, acylthio, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • thio derivative also includes thiocarbamate, and the like.
  • acyl includes formyl, and alkylcarbonyl, alkenylcarbonyl, alkynylcarbonyl, heteroalkylcarbonyl, heteroalkenylcarbonyl,
  • heteroalkynylcarbonyl cycloalkylcarbonyl, cycloalkenylcarbonyl, cycloheteroalkylcarbonyl, cycloheteroalkenylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, arylalkylcarbonyl, arylalkenylcarbonyl, arylalkynylcarbonyl, acylcarbonyl, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • sulfonyl includes alkylsulfonyl, alkenylsulfonyl, alkynylsulfonyl, heteroalkylsulfonyl, heteroalkenylsulfonyl, heteroalkynylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfonyl, cycloalkenylsulfonyl, cycloheteroalkylsulfonyl,
  • arylalkynylsulfonyl heteroarylsulfonyl, heteroarylalkylsulfonyl, heteroarylalkenylsulfonyl, heteroarylalkynylsulfonyl, acylsulfonyl, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • phosphonic acid or a derivative thereof includes PO 3 H 2 and salts thereof, and esters and amides thereof.
  • carboxylate and derivatives thereof includes the group C0 2 H and salts thereof, and esters and amides thereof, and CN.
  • optionally substituted includes the replacement of hydrogen atoms with other functional groups on the radical that is optionally substituted.
  • Such other functional groups illustratively include, but are not limited to, amino, hydroxyl, halo, thiol, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and the like.
  • any of amino, hydroxyl, thiol, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, and/or sulfonic acid is optionally substituted.
  • optionally substituted aryl includes the replacement of hydrogen atoms with other functional groups on the aryl that is optionally substituted.
  • Such other functional groups illustratively include, but are not limited to, amino, hydroxyl, halo, thiol, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and the like.
  • any of amino, hydroxyl, thiol, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, and/or sulfonic acid is optionally substituted.
  • Illustrative substituents include, but are not limited to, a radical -(CH 2 ) x Z , where x is an integer from 0-6 and Z is selected from halogen, hydroxy, alkanoyloxy, including C -C alkanoyloxy, optionally substituted aroyloxy, alkyl, including C -C alkyl, alkoxy, including CrC 6 alkoxy, cycloalkyl, including C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, including C 3 -C 8 cycloalkoxy, alkenyl, including C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, alkynyl, including C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, haloalkyl, including C -C haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, including C -C haloalkoxy, halocycloalkyl, including C 3 -C 8 halocycloalkyl, halocycloalk
  • alkyl alkylcarbonylamino, aminoalkyl, CrC 6 alkylaminoalkyl, (CrC 6 alkyl)(Ci-C 6
  • Z x is selected from -C0 2 R 4 and -CONR 5 R 6 , where R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each independently selected in each occurrence from hydrogen, CrC 6 alkyl, and aryl-C C 6 alkyl.
  • protecting group generally refers to chemical functional groups that can be selectively appended to and removed from functionality, such as amine groups, present in a chemical compound to render such functionality inert to chemical reaction conditions to which the compound is exposed. See. e.g., Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1991. Numerous amine protecting groups are known in the art. Illustrative examples include the benzyloxycarbonyl (CBz), chlorobenzyloxycarbonyl, t-butyloxycarbonyl (Boc), fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (Fmoc), isonicotinyloxycarbonyl (i-Noc) groups.
  • prodrug generally refers to any compound that when administered to a biological system generates a biologically active compound as a result of one or more spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme-catalyzed chemical reaction(s), and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s), or a combination thereof.
  • the prodrug is typically acted upon by an enzyme (such as esterases, amidases, phosphatases, and the like), simple biological chemistry, or other process in vivo to liberate or regenerate the more pharmacologically active drug. This activation may occur through the action of an endogenous host enzyme or a non- endogenous enzyme that is administered to the host preceding, following, or during
  • prodrug administration of the prodrug. Additional details of prodrug use are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,627,165; and Pathalk et al., Enzymic protecting group techniques in organic synthesis, Stereosel. Biocatal. 775-797 (2000). It is appreciated that the prodrug is advantageously converted to the original drug as soon as the goal, such as targeted delivery, safety, stability, and the like is achieved, followed by the subsequent rapid elimination of the released remains of the group forming the prodrug.
  • Prodrugs may be prepared from the compounds described herein by attaching groups that ultimately cleave in vivo to one or more functional groups present on the compound, such as -OH-, -SH, -C0 2 H, -NR 2 .
  • Illustrative prodrugs include but are not limited to carboxylate esters where the group is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, acyloxyalkyl,
  • esters include but are not limited to 1-indanyl, N- oxysuccinimide; acyloxyalkyl groups such as acetoxymethyl, pivaloyloxymethyl,
  • alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl groups such as ethoxycarbonyloxymethyl, a-ethoxycarbonyloxyethyl, ⁇ -ethoxycarbonyloxyethyl, and the like
  • dialkylaminoalkyl groups including di-lower alkylamino alkyl groups, such as
  • Further illustrative prodrugs contain a chemical moiety, such as an amide or phosphorus group functioning to increase solubility and/or stability of the compounds described herein.
  • Further illustrative prodrugs for amino groups include, but are not limited to, (C 3 -C 2 o)alkanoyl; halo-(C 3 -C 2 o)alkanoyl; (C 3 -C 2 o)alkenoyl; (C4-C7)cycloalkanoyl; (C 3 -C 6 )- cycloalkyl(C 2 -C 1 6)alkanoyl; optionally substituted aroyl, such as unsubstituted aroyl or aroyl substituted by 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, trifluoromethanesulphonyloxy, (Ci-C3)alkyl and (CrC ⁇ alkoxy, each of which is optionally further substituted with
  • prodrugs themselves may not possess significant biological activity, but instead undergo one or more spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme-catalyzed chemical reaction(s), and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s), or a
  • prodrug is biologically active. It is also appreciated that prodrugs may often serves to improve drug efficacy or safety through improved oral bioavailability, pharmacodynamic half-life, and the like. Prodrugs also refer to derivatives of the compounds described herein that include groups that simply mask undesirable drug properties or improve drug delivery.
  • one or more compounds described herein may exhibit an undesirable property that is advantageously blocked or minimized may become pharmacological, pharmaceutical, or pharmacokinetic barriers in clinical drug application, such as low oral drug absorption, lack of site specificity, chemical instability, toxicity, and poor patient acceptance (bad taste, odor, pain at injection site, and the like), and others. It is appreciated herein that a prodrug, or other strategy using reversible derivatives, can be useful in the optimization of the clinical application of a drug.
  • the term "treating", "contacting” or “reacting” when referring to a chemical reaction means to add or mix two or more reagents under appropriate conditions to produce the indicated and/or the desired product. It should be appreciated that the reaction which produces the indicated and/or the desired product may not necessarily result directly from the combination of two reagents which were initially added, i.e., there may be one or more intermediates which are produced in the mixture which ultimately leads to the formation of the indicated and/or the desired product.
  • composition generally refers to any product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combinations of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts. It is to be understood that the compositions described herein may be prepared from isolated compounds described herein or from salts, solutions, hydrates, solvates, and other forms of the compounds described herein. It is also to be understood that the compositions may be prepared from various amorphous, non-amorphous, partially crystalline, crystalline, and/or other morphological forms of the compounds described herein. It is also to be understood that the compositions may be prepared from various hydrates and/or solvates of the compounds described herein.
  • compositions that recite compounds described herein are to be understood to include each of, or any combination of, the various morphological forms and/or solvate or hydrate forms of the compounds described herein.
  • compositions may include one or more carriers, diluents, and/or excipients.
  • the compounds described herein, or compositions containing them, may be formulated in a therapeutically effective amount in any conventional dosage forms appropriate for the methods described herein.
  • compositions containing them may be administered by a wide variety of conventional routes for the methods described herein, and in a wide variety of dosage formats, utilizing known procedures (see generally, Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, (21 st ed., 2005)).
  • reaction was filtered to remove the imidazole HC1 salt, extracted with de-ionized water, and the aqueous phase was back- washed with dichloromethane, the combined organic phase was washed with brine, dried over Na 2 S0 4 , filtered to remove the Na 2 S0 4 , concentrated under reduced pressure, co-evaporated with toluene and dried under high-vacuum overnight to give 6.4 g of crude product 4 (vs 5.9 g of theoretical yield).
  • TES protected dipeptide was dissolved in 38 mL THF (anhydrous, inhibitor- free) and cooled to -45 °C and stirred for 15 minutes before adding KHMDS (0.5 M in toluene, 25.5 mL, 12.8 mmol, 1.1 equiv) drop-wise. After the addition of KHMDS was complete, the reaction mixture was stirred at -45 °C for 15 minutes, and chloromethyl butyrate (1.8 mL, 1.2 equiv, 14 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture changed from light yellow to a bluish color.
  • the flask was shaken under hydrogen (30-35 psi) for 5 hours.
  • the reaction mixture was analyzed by HPLC. The starting material was found to be less than 3%.
  • the mixture was filtered through diatomaceous earth.
  • the diatomaceous earth was extracted with 200 mL ethyl acetate.
  • the filtrate and the ethyl acetate extract were combined and transferred to a separatory funnel and washed with 1% NaHCO 3 /10% NaCl solution (200 mL x 4).
  • the organic layer was isolated and evaporated on a rotary evaporator under reduced pressure.
  • the crude product was dissolved in 40 mL of MeOH/H 2 0 (3: 1).
  • Tripeptide 8 (229 mg, 0.367 mmol) was dissolved in EtOAc (anhydrous), 134.9 mg (0.733 mmol, 2.0 equiv) of pentafluorophenol was added, followed by 970 mg (1.84 mmol, 5.0 equiv) of DCC on the resin. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. LC-MS analysis indicated >96% conversion. The reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated to dryness, dried under high vacuum for 5 minutes.
  • reaction was filtered to remove the imidazole HC1 salt, extracted with de-ionized water, and the aqueous phase was back-washed with dichloromethane, the combined organic phase was washed with brine, dried over Na 2 S0 4 , filtered to remove the Na 2 S0 4 , concentrated under reduced pressure, co-evaporated with toluene and dried under high-vacuum overnight to give 12.2 g of product 4.
  • TES protected dipeptide was dissolved in 80 mL THF (anhydrous, inhibitor- free) and cooled to -45 °C and stirred for 15 minutes before adding KHMDS (0.5 M in toluene, 50 mL, 25.0 mmol, 1.05 equiv) drop-wise. After the addition of KHMDS was complete, the reaction mixture was stirred at -45 °C for 15 minutes, and chloromethyl butyrate (3.6 mL, 1.2 equiv, 28.3 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture changed from light yellow to a bluish color.
  • the celite was washed with 500 mL ethyl acetate. The solutions were combined and transferred to a separatory funnel and washed with 1% NaHCO 3 /10% NaCl solution (250 mL x 4). The organic layer was isolated and evaporated on a rotary evaporator under reduced pressure. The crude product was dissolved in dichloromethane and the urea was filtered. The crude product solution was loaded onto a Teledyne Redisep Silica Column (330g) and purified with EtO Ac/petroleum ether on
  • Method B The crude tripeptide acid 8 (2.67 g, 4.30 mmol) was dissolved mL of DCM (anhydrous), 1.59 g (8.6 mmol, 2.0 equiv) of pentafluorophenol was added, followed by 9.33 g (21.5 mmol, 5.0 equiv) of DCC on the resin. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. LC-MS analysis indicated >96% conversion. The reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated to dryness, dried under high vacuum for 5 minutes.
  • EXAMPLE Synthesis of azido methylbutyrate dipeptide 5. 10.83 g of dipeptide 3 (27.25 mmol) was dissolved in 100 mL dichloromethane and imidazole (2.05 g, 1.1 eq.) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature to dissolve all solids and cooled in the ice bath for 10 min. TESC1 (4.8 mL, 1.05 eqiv.) was added drop-wise at 0°C, stirred under argon, and warmed to room temperature over 1.5 h. TLC (3: 1 hexanes/EtOAc) showed complete conversion. The reaction was filtered to remove the imidazole HC1 salt.
  • TES protected dipeptide was dissolved in 100 mL THF (anhydrous, inhibitor-free), cooled to -45°C, and stirred at -45°C for 15 minutes before adding KHMDS (0.5 M in toluene, 61 mL, 1.05 equiv.), drop-wise. After the addition of KHMDS was finished, the reaction was stirred at -45°C for 20 minutes, and chloromethyl butyrate (4.4 mL, 1.1 equiv.) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at -45 °C for another 20 minutes. The reaction was quenched with 25 mL MeOH and warmed to room temperature.
  • KHMDS 0.5 M in toluene, 61 mL, 1.05 equiv.
  • TFA was removed under reduced pressure, co-evaporated with CH 2 CI 2 (3 x 30 mL) and activated Tut-derivative 9 was dried under high vacuum for 18h.
  • the tripeptide acid 8 (2.51 g, 4.02 mmol) was dissolved in 70 mL CH 2 CI 2 (anhydrous) and 1.48 g (8.04 mmol, 2.0 equiv) of
  • EXAMPLE General Synthesis of Disulfide Containing Tubulysin Conjugates.
  • a binding ligand- linker intermediate containing a thiol group is taken in deionized water (ca. 20 mg/mL, bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) and the pH of the suspension was adjusted with aqueous phosphate (bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) to a pH of about 7.0 (the suspension may become a solution when the pH increased).
  • Additional deionized water is added (ca. 20-25%) to the solution as needed, and to the aqueous solution is added immediately a solution of compound (2) in acetonitrile (ca. 20 mg/mL). The reaction mixture becomes homogenous quickly.
  • the reaction mixture is diluted with 2.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.0, ca 150 volume percent) and the acetonitrile is removed under vacuum. The resulting suspension is filtered and the filtrate may be purified by preparative HPLC. Fractions are lyophilized to isolate the conjugates.
  • the foregoing method is equally applicable for preparing other tubulysin conjugates by the appropriate selection of the tubulysin starting compound, including tubulysin starting compounds having a 3-nitropyridin-2-ylthio activating group.
  • This binding ligand-linker intermediate was prepared by SPPS according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4- methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
  • Coupling steps In a peptide synthesis vessel add the resin, add the amino acid solution, DIPEA, and PyBOP. Bubble argon for lhr. and wash 3X with DMF and IPA. Use 20% piperidine in DMF for Fmoc deprotection, 3X (lOmin), before each amino acid coupling. Continue to complete all 9 coupling steps. At the end treat the resin with 2% hydrazine in DMF 3X (5min) to cleave TFA protecting group on Pteroic acid, wash the resin with DMF (3X), IPA (3X), MeOH (3X), and bubble the resin with argon for 30 min.
  • Cleavage step Reagent: 92.5% TFA, 2.5% H 2 0, 2.5% triisopropylsilane, 2.5% ethanedithiol.
  • EC0531 is prepared according to the processes described herein from compound (2) and EC0488 in 73% yield.
  • the ether analog of compound 103 can also be prepared. Reductive condensation of that ether analog with MEP yields 105 directly.
  • reaction was filtered to remove the imidazole HC1 salt, extracted with de-ionized water, and the aqueous phase was back-washed with dichloromethane. The combined organic phase was washed with brine, dried over Na 2 S0 4 , filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was co- evaporated with toluene and dried over high-vacuum overnight to give 6.4 g of crude product 102 (5.9 g theoretical yield).
  • the flask was shaken under hydrogen (30-35 psi) for 5 hours.
  • the reaction mixture was analyzed by HPLC. The starting material was found to be less than 3%.
  • the mixture was filtered through celite. The celite was washed with ethyl acetate (200 mL). The combined filtrate was transferred to separatory funnel and washed with 1% NaHCO 3 /10% NaCl solution (200 mL x 4). The organic layer was isolated and rotavaped under reduced pressure.
  • the crude product was dissolved in 40 mL of MeOH/H20 (3: 1).
  • the crude product solution was loaded onto a Biotage C18 column (Flash 65i, 350g, 450mL, 65 x 200 mm) and eluted with buffer A [lOmM NFLOAc/ACN (1: 1)] and B (ACN). The fractions were collected and organic solvent was removed under reduced pressure. A 10% NaCl solution (100 mL) and methyl t-buyl ether (MTBE) (100 mL)were added to the flask and the mixture was transferred to a separatory funnel. The organic layer was isolated and dried over anhydrous Na 2 S0 4 , filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. 2.5g of tripeptide intermediate 104 was obtained (yield 50%).
  • 117b EXAMPLE Compound 117b.
  • 114b In a 25mL round bottom flask, 114b (3.2mg, 0.003 mmol) was dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide (2mL).
  • a solution of 116 (4.9mg, 0.003 mmol) in 20mM, pH7, sodium phosphate buffer (2mL) was added dropwise, stirring at room temperature with argon bubbling for 30 min.
  • LCMS (10-100% ACN, 50mM NH 4 HC0 3 pH7) indicated all of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed.
  • the reaction mixture was purified by preparative HPLC (10-100% ACN, 50mM NH 4 HC0 3 pH7) to yield 117b (4.3mg, 56%).
  • EXAMPLE Synthesis of EC1761. 0.38 g of MEP (2.65 mmole, 1.4 equiv.) was suspended in 1.2 mL NMP, 0.53 g of PFP (2.88mmole, 1.5 equiv.) and 0.55 g of EDC (2.87 mmole, 1.5 equiv.) were added. The reactionmixture was stirred overnight in a hydrogenation vessel.
  • EXAMPLE Synthesis of EC1633. 0.80 g (1.37 mmole) of tripeptide acid EC1602 was dissolved in 6.4 mL of pyridine, the solution was cooled to 0°C. 6.0 mg (0.049 mmole, 0.035 equiv) DMAP was added and then 2 mL of acetic anhydride (21.2 mmole, 15.5 equiv) was added, the reaction mixture was warmed up to room temperature in 5 hours and stored in -20 0°C for 2 days. 20 mL dioxane/20 mL H20 was added to the reaction mixture at 0°C and stirred for 1 hour. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 minutes, concentrated on a Buchi Rotavapor at 30°C for 10 minutes, residue stirred at ambient temperature under high vacuum for 75 minutes, and to which was added saturated NaHC0 3 solution (10 mL) with vigorous stirring, followed by addition of acetonitrile (ACN, 3.0 mL).
  • ACN acetonitrile
  • the resulting white suspension was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 minutes and let stand to settle.
  • the top clear solution was loaded onto a Biotage SNAP 12 g KP-C18-HS column on a Biotage system.
  • the white solid left in the reaction flask was dissolved in water (5.0 mL) and the solution was also loaded onto the Biotage column.
  • Step 2 EC1426 (114 mg) was dissolved in anhydrous DCM (1.5 mL) and to which was added TFA (0.50 mL). The resulting solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 70 minutes and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue, which was co-evaporated with anhydrous DCM (2.0 mL x 3) and vacuumed at ambient temperature for 9 hours prior to use in Step 3.
  • Step 3 The residue from Step 1 was dissolved in anhydrous DCM (1.5 mL) and to this solution was added DIPEA (0.50 mL) followed by a solution of the residue from Step 2 dissolved in anhydrous dimethylformamide (DMF, 1.5 mL). The resulting solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 1 hour, diluted with ethyl acetate (EtOAc, 60 mL), and washed with brine (20 mL x 3).
  • EtOAc ethyl acetate
  • the ether analogs of compounds 111 and 112 can be used to prep tubulysin intermediates described herein.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
  • Pyridine Compounds (AREA)
  • Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)

Abstract

The invention described herein pertains to processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives, conjugates of tubulysins, and intermediates therefore. In one illustrative embodiment of the invention, processes for derivatives or analogs of natural tubulysins including compounds of formula (T). In another embodiment, vitamin receptor binding conjugates of tubulysins are described. The processes include one or more steps described herein. In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula B, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as each being independently selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R8 is C1-C6 n-alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula A with a silylating agent, such as triethylsilyl chloride, and a base, such as imidazole in an aprotic solvent.

Description

PROCESSES FOR PREPARING TUBULYSIN DERIVATIVES AND CONJUGATES
THEREOF
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
The present application claims the benefit under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e) of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/617386, filed March 29, 2012, U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/684450, filed August 17, 2012, U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/771451, filed March 1, 2013, and U.S. Provisional Application 61/794720, filed March 15, 2013, the entirety of each of the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated herein by reference.
TECHNICAL FIELD
The invention described herein pertains to processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives, conjugates of tubulysins, and intermediates therefore.
BACKGROUND AND SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The tubulysins are members of a new class of natural products isolated from myxobacterial species (F. Sasse, et al., /. Antibiot. 2000, 53, 879-885). As cytoskeleton interacting agents, the tubulysins are mitotic poisons that inhibit tubulin polymerization and lead to cell cycle arrest and apoptosis (H. Steinmetz, et al., Chem. Int. Ed. 2004, 43, 4888- 4892; M. Khalil, et al., ChemBioChem. 2006, 7, 678-683;G. Kaur, et al., Biochem. J. 2006, 396, 235-242). Tubulysins are extremely potent cytotoxic molecules, and exceed the cell growth inhibition of many other clinically relevant traditional chemotherapeutics, including epothilones, paclitaxel, and vinblastine. Furthermore, they are potent against multidrug resistant cell lines (A. Domling, et al., Mol. Diversity 2005, 9, 141-147). These compounds show high cytotoxicity tested against a panel of cancer cell lines with IC50 values in the low picomolar range; thus, they are of interest as potential anticancer therapeutics. However, tubulysins have been reported to exhibit a narrow, or in some cases nonexistent, therapeutic window such that disease treatment with tubulysins is hampered by toxicity and other unwanted side effects. Accordingly, tubulysins have been conjugated with targeting agents to improve their therapeutic window. A total synthesis of tubulysin D possessing C-terminal tubuphenylalanine (RA=H) (H. Peltier, et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2006, 128, 16018-16019) has been reported. Recently, a modified synthetic protocol toward the synthesis of tubulysin B (RA=OH) (O. Pando, et at., Org. Lett. 2009, 11, 5567-5569) has been reported. However, attempts to follow the published procedures to provide larger quantities of tubulysins were unsuccessful, being hampered in part by low yields, difficult to remove impurities, the need for expensive chromatographic steps, and/or the lack of reproducibility of several steps. The interest in using tubulysins for anticancer therapeutics accents the need for reliable and efficient processes for preparing tubulysins, and analogs and derivatives thereof. Therefore, there is a need for tubulysin derivatives, tubulysin analogs, and other tubulysin conjugate intermediates that are useful for preparing such targeted conjugates.
Tubulysin derivatives useful for preparing vitamin receptor binding tubulysin conjugates (also referred to herein as tubulysin linker derivatives) are described herein.
Structurally, tubulysin linker derivatives include linear tetrapeptoid backbones, including illustrative compounds having the following formula
Figure imgf000003_0001
and salts thereof, wherein
Ari is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
L is selected from the group consisting of
-(CR2)PCRARB-,
Figure imgf000003_0002
where p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
RA, RB, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of RA, RB, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring; RAT represents hydrogen, or 1 to 4 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of amino or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and heteroarylheteroalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted;
X is hydrogen; or X is alkyl or alkenyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or X is R16C(0)CH(R17)CH2; where R17 is C(0)R16, C(0)OR16, or CN; where R16 is independently in each instance alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or X is 18
CH2QR ; where Q is N, O, or
18
S; and R is alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, or
heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted, or 18
R is acyl, sulfonyl, or phosphonic acid or a derivative thereof;
R4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R3 is optionally substituted alkyl;
R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
RAT represents hydrogen, or 1 to 4 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of amino or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and heteroarylheteroalkyl; and n is 1, 2, 3, or 4.
In another embodiment, X is Y-CH2, where Y is R2C(0)0 or R120; R2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
In another embodiment compounds of the formula
Figure imgf000004_0001
and salts thereof, are described. In another embodiment, the tubulysin linker derivative has formula
Figure imgf000004_0002
or a salt thereof. In another embodiment, the tubulysin linker derivative has formula T2
Figure imgf000005_0001
or a salt thereof.
In another embodiment, in any of the embodiments described herein Ar is optionally substituted aryl.
In another embodiment, in any of the embodiments described herein Ar is optionally substituted heteroaryl.
Another illustrative group of tubulysins described herein are more particularly comprised of one or more non-naturally occurring or hydrophobic amino acid segments, such as N-methyl pipecolic acid (Mep), isoleucine (He),
Figure imgf000005_0002
tubuvalin tubutyrosine tubuphenylalanine
(Tuv) , an analog of tyrosine) (Tup, an analog of phenylalanine) and analogs and derivative of each of the foregoing. Derivatives and analogs of tubuvaline include compounds of the followin formula,
Figure imgf000005_0003
wherein R4, R5 and R6 are as described in any of the embodiments described herein.
Derivatives and analogs of tubutyrosine or tubuphenylalanine include compounds having formula,
Figure imgf000005_0004
wherein R3 and Ar are as described in any of the embodiment described herein. A common feature in the molecular architecture of potent natural occurring tubulysins is the acid and/or base sensitive N-acyloxymethyl substituent (or a /V,O-acetal of formaldehyde) represented by R2C02CH2 in the formula (Tl).
In another embodiment, the compounds described herein are NHNH-C(0)0-L-
SS-Ar2 derivatives of naturally occurring tubulysins. An illustrative group of tubulysin derivatives described herein are those havin formula 1.
Figure imgf000006_0001
Formula 1, Structures of several tubulysin derivatives
Figure imgf000006_0002
Processes for preparing tubulysins, and analogs and derivatives thereof, are also described in WO 2012/019123, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
The formation of tubulysins conjugated to vitamin receptor binding moieties for targeted and/or selective delivery to cell populations expressing, overexpressing or selectively expressing cell surface vitamin receptors necessitates further modification of the highly toxic tubulysins. Described herein are improved processes for making natural tubulysins analogs or derivatives, which are useful for preparing vitamin receptor binding tubulysin conjugates including compounds of formula (T) and formula (1). Vitamin receptor binding conjugates of tubulysins are described in U.S. Patent Publication 2010/0048490, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
In one illustrative embodiment of the invention, processes for derivatives or analogs of natural tubulysins including compounds of formula (T). In another embodiment, vitamin receptor binding conjugates of tubulysins are described. The processes include one or more steps described herein. In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula B, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as each being independently selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and Rg is C1-C6 n-alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula A with a silylating agent, such as triethylsilyl chloride, and a base such as imidazole in an aprotic solvent.
Figure imgf000007_0001
It is to be understood that R5 and R6 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula C, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as each being independently selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; Rg is C1-C6 n-alkyl; and R2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula B with a base and a compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 in an aprotic solvent at a temperature below ambient temperature, such as in the range from about -78°C to about 0°C; wherein the molar ratio of the compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 to the compound of formula B is from about 1 to about 1.5.
Figure imgf000007_0002
It is to be understood that R2, R5 and R6 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula D, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; Rg is Cl- C6 n-alkyl; R2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the steps of
a) preparing a compound of formula (El) where is a leaving group from a compound of formula E; and
b) treating a compound of formula C under reducing conditions in the presence of the compound of formula El.
Figure imgf000008_0001
It is to be understood that R2, R5, R6, and R7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula F, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the rocess comprises the step of treating compound D with a hydrolase enzyme.
Figure imgf000008_0002
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula F, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating compound D with a trialkyltin hydroxide (e.g. trimethyltin hydroxide). It is to be understood that R2, R5, R6, and R7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula AF, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound D with an alcohol, R12OH, where R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a transesterification catalyst. In one embodiment the transesterification catalyst is trifluoroacetic acid (TFA). In another embodiment, the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of
(R13)8Sn402(NCS)4, (Ri3)2Sn(OAc)2, (Ri3)2SnO, (R13)2SnCl2, (Ri3)2SnS, (R13)3SnOH, and (R13)3SnOSn(R1 ) , where R1 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted. In another embodiment, the
transesterification catalyst is( R13)2SnO. Illustrative examples of R13 include methyl, n-butyl. n-octyl, phenyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p-MeO phenyl, phenethyl, and benzyl.
Figure imgf000009_0001
It is to be understood that R5, R6, R12, and R7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a transesterification product of each of the compounds of formula A and/or B, wherein R5, R6, and R8 are as described in the various embodiments herein, and where RT 2 is different from Rg; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound B with an alcohol, R12OH, where R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a transesterification catalyst. Illustratively, the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of
(R13)8Sn402(NCS)4, (Ri3)2Sn(OAc)2, (Ri3)2SnO, (R13)2SnCl2, (Ri3)2SnS, (R13)3SnOH, and (R13)3SnOSn(R13)3, where R13 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted. In another embodiment, the
transesterification catalyst is (R1 )2SnO. Illustrative examples of R1 include methyl, n-butyl. n-octyl phenyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p-MeO phenyl, phenethyl, and benzyl.
Figure imgf000010_0001
It is to be understood that R5, R6, and R12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula G, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating the silyl ether of compound F with a non- basic fluoride containing reagent.
Figure imgf000010_0002
It is to be understood that R2, R5, R6, and R7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula AG, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound F with an alcohol, R12OH, where R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a transesterification catalyst. In one embodiment the transesterification catalyst is trifluoroacetic acid (TFA). In another embodiment, the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of
(R13)8Sn402(NCS)4, (Ri3)2Sn(OAc)2, (Ri3)2SnO, (R13)2SnCl2, (Ri3)2SnS, (R13)3SnOH, and (R13)3SnOSn(R1 ) , where R1 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted. In another embodiment, the
transesterification catalyst is ( R13)2SnO. Illustrative examples of R13 are methyl, n-butyl. n- octyl, henyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p-MeO phenyl, phenethyl,and benzyl.
Figure imgf000011_0001
It is to be understood that R2, R5, R6, R7, and R12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula BG, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R12 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound AF with a metal hydroxide or carbonate. Illustrative examples of a metal hydroxide or carbonate include LiOH, Li2C03, NaOH, Na2C03, KOH, K2C03, Ca(OH)2, CaC03, M OH)2, MgC03, and the like.
Figure imgf000011_0002
It is to be understood that R5, R6, R7, and R12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents. In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula H, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 and R4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula G with an acylating agent of formula R C(0)X2, where X2 is a leaving group.
Figure imgf000012_0001
It is to be understood that R2, R^, R5, R6, and R7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula AH, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 and R4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R12 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula BG with an acylating agent of formula R4C(0)X2, where X2 is a leavin group.
Figure imgf000012_0002
It is to be understood that R4, R5, R6, and R7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a tubulysin linker derivative of formula (Tl), wherein Ar is optionally substituted aryl; Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl; L is selected from the group consisting of -(CR2)PCRARB-,
Figure imgf000013_0001
where
p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
RA, RB, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of RA, RB, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof; Ri is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or a pro-drug forming group; R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R3 is optionally substituted alkyl; R2 and R4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
wherein the process comprises the step of forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula H; and reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I to ive a compound of the formula T.
Figure imgf000013_0002
It is to be understood that Ar1; Ar2, Ri, R2, R4, R5, R6, and R7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a tubulysin linker derivative of formula (T2), wherein Α is optionally substituted aryl; Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl; L is selected from the group consisting of
-(CR2)pCRaRb-,
Figure imgf000014_0001
p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
Ra, Rb, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of Ra, Rb, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
Ri is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or a pro-drug forming group; R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R3 is optionally substituted alkyl; R2 and R4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound T, with an alcohol, R12OH, where R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a transesterification catalyst.
In one embodiment the transesterification catalyst is trifluoroacetic acid (TFA). In another embodiment, the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of (Ri3)8Sn402(NCS)4, (Ri3)2Sn(OAc)2, (Ri3)2SnO, (Ri3)2SnCl2, (Ri3)2SnS, (Ri3)3SnOH, and (R13)3SnOSn(R13)3, where R13 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted. In another embodiment, the
transesterification catalyst is ( R1 )2SnO. Illustrative examples of R1 are methyl, n-butyl. n- octyl, phenyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p-MeO phenyl, phenethyl,and benzyl. It is to be understood that Ar1 ; Ar2, Ri, R2, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
Figure imgf000015_0001
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a tubulysin linker derivative of formula (T2), wherein Α is optionally substituted aryl; Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl; L is selected from the group consisting of
-(C—R w2)pCRaRb- ,,
Figure imgf000015_0002
where
p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
Ra, Rb, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of Ra, Rb, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
Ri is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or a pro-drug forming group; R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R3 is optionally substituted alkyl; R2 and R4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
wherein the process comprises the step of forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula AH; and reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I to ive a compound of the formula AT.
Figure imgf000016_0001
It is to be understood that Ar1; Ar2, R1; R12, R3, R4, R5, R6, and R7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
It is to be understood that the acyloxymethyl group (R2-C(0)-CH2) present on any of compounds C, D, F, G, H, and Tl may be converted into the corresponding ether group (Ri 2-O-CH2), or other group (X or Y-CH2) using the process of contacting the compound with trifluoroacetic acid (TFA), as described herein, and also as described in WO
2009/055562, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Accordingly, the following com ounds are also described herein
Figure imgf000016_0002
XD YD
Figure imgf000017_0001
XH YH
It is to be further understood that each of XC, XD, XF, XG, and XH can be used in the processes described herein in place of each of C, D, F, G, and H, respectively, to prepare the corresponding compound having an ether group (R 2-O-CH2), or other group (X).
It is to be further understood that each of YC, YD, YF, YG, and YH can be used in the processes described herein in place of each of C, D, F, G, and H, respectively, to prepare the corresponding compound having an ether group (R 2-O-CH2), or other group (Y-CH2). DETAILED DESCRIPTION
In one embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula B, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and Rg is C1-C6 n-alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula A with triethylsilyl chloride and imidazole in an a rotic solvent.
Figure imgf000017_0002
In the previously reported preparations of the intermediate silyl ether of formula 2, use of a large excess of triethylsilyl trifluoromethylsulfonate (TESOTf) and lutidine is described (see, for example, Peltier, et al., 2006). It was found that the reported process makes it necessary to submit the product of the reaction to a chromatographic purification step.
Contrary to that reported, it has been surprisingly discovered herein that the less reactive reagent TESC1 may be used. It has also been surprisingly discovered herein that although TESC1 is a less reactive reagent, it may nonetheless be used in nearly stoichiometric amounts in the processes described herein. It is appreciated herein that the use of the less reactive TESCl may also be advantageous when the process is performed on larger scales, where higher reactivity reagents may represent a safety issue. It has also been discovered that the use of TESCl in nearly stoichiometric amounts renders the chromatographic purification step unnecessary. In an alternative of the embodiment, the process is performed without subsequent purification. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R5 is isopropyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R6 is sec -butyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, Rg is methyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, the silyl ether is TES.
In an illustrative example of the processes described herein, a process for preparing the silyl ether 4 in high yield is described wherein compound 1 is treated with 1.05 equivalent of TESCl and 1.1 equivalent of imidazole.
Figure imgf000018_0001
In one alternative of the foregoing example, the compound 4 is not purified by
chromatography.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula C, wherein R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; Rg is C1-C6 n-alkyl; and R2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula B with from about 1 equivalent to about 1.5 equivalent of base and from about 1 equivalent to about 1.5 equivalent of a compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 in an aprotic solvent at a temperature from about -78°C to about 0°C.
Figure imgf000018_0002
In another embodiment, the process of the preceding embodiment is described wherein the compounds of formulae B and C have the stereochemistry shown in the following scheme for B' and C.
Figure imgf000019_0001
In another illustrative embodiment, the ether analog of C can be used to prepare the tubulysins, the tubulysin conjugates, and the tubulysin linker compounds described herein.
In another illustrative embodiment, the process of any one of the preceding embodiments is described wherein about 1 equivalent to about 1.3 equivalent of a compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 is used. In another illustrative example, the process of any one of the preceding embodiments is described, wherein about 1.2 equivalent of a compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 is used. In another illustrative example, the process of any one of the preceding embodiments is described wherein R2 is n-propyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R2 is
CH2CH(CH3)2, CH2CH2CH3, CH2CH3, CH=C(CH3)2, or CH3.
In an illustrative example of the processes described herein, a process for preparing the N,0-acetal 5 is described. In another illustrative example, compound 2 is treated with 1.1 equivalent of potassium hexamethyldisilazane (KHMDS) and 1.2 equivalent of chloromethyl butanoate in a nonprotic solvent at about -45°C. In another illustrative example, the product formed by any of the preceding examples may be used without chromatographic purificatio
Figure imgf000019_0002
The ether analogs of compound 5 can also be used to prepare the tubuly tubulysin linker compounds
Figure imgf000019_0003
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula D, wherein R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and cycloalkyl; R8 is C1-C6 n-alkyl; R2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the steps of
a) preparing a compound of formula (El) where X1 is a leaving group from a compound of formula E; and
b) treating a compound of formula C under reducing conditions with the compound of formula El
Figure imgf000020_0001
D
In one illustrative example, a mixture of compound 5 and the pentafluorophenyl ester of D-N-methyl-pipecolic acid is reduced using H2 and a palladium-on-charcoal catalyst (Pd/C) to yield compound 6. It has been discovered herein that epimerization of the active ester of pipecolic acid can occur during reaction or during its preparation or during the reduction under the previously reported reaction conditions. For example, contrary to prior reports indicating that epimerization does not occur (see, for example, Peltier, 2006), upon repeating those reported processes on a larger scale it was found here that substantial amounts of epimerized compounds were formed. In addition, it was discovered herein that substantial amounts of rearrangement products formed by the rearrangement of the butyryl group to compound 8a were formed using the reported processes. Finally, it was discovered herein that the typical yields of the desired products using the previously reported processes were only about half of that reported. It has been discovered herein that using diisopropylcarbodiimide (DIC) and short reaction times lessens that amount of both the unwanted by-product resulting from the epimerization reaction and the by-product resulting from the rearrangement reaction. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, n is 3. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R7 is methyl.
In one illustrative example, it was found that limiting the reaction time for the preparation of pentafluorophenyl D-N-methyl-pipecolate to about 1 hour lessened the formation of the diastereomeric tripeptide 9a. It has also been discovered that using dry 10% Pd/C as catalyst, rather than a more typically used wet or moist catalyst, lessens the amount of epimer 9 formed during the reduction. It has also been discovered that using dry 10%P/C and/or shorter reaction times also lessens the formation of rearranged amide 8.
Figure imgf000021_0001
In another embodiment the ether analogs of 5 and 6 can be used to prepare the tubulysins, tubulysin conjugates, and tubulysin linker compounds described herein. It has been previously reported that removal of the protecting group from the secondary hydroxyl group leads to an inseparable mixture of the desired product 5a and a cyclic O,N-acetal side-product, 5b, as shown in the following scheme.
Figure imgf000022_0001
Further, upon repeating the reported process, it has been discovered herein that removal of the methyl ester using basic conditions, followed by acetylation of the hydroxyl group leads to an additional previously unreported side-product, iso-7a. That additional side-product is difficult to detect and difficult to separate from the desired compound 7a. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that iso-7a results from rearrangement of the butyrate group from the N-hydrox methyl group to the secondary hydroxyl group, as shown below.
Figure imgf000022_0002
It has been discovered that reordering the two deprotection steps and using different conditions for each deprotection reaction results in improved yields of compounds of formula H, such as compound 7a, after introduction of the R4CO group on the secondary hydroxyl group, as further described below.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula AF, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound D with an alcohol, R12OH, where R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a transesterification catalyst. In one embodiment the transesterification catalyst is trifluoroacetic acid (TFA). In another embodiment, the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of
(Ri3)8Sn402(NCS)4, (Ri3)2Sn(OAc)2, (Ri3)2SnO, (Ri3)2SnCl2, (Ri3)2SnS, (Ri3)3SnOH, and (R13)3SnOSn(R1 ) , where R1 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted. In another embodiment, the catalyst is (R13)2SnO. Illustrative examples of R13 are methyl, n-butyl, n-octyl, phenyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p- MeO phen l, phenethyl,and benzyl.
Figure imgf000023_0001
It is to be understood that R5, R6, Ri2, and R7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula F, wherein R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating compound D with a h drolase enzyme.
Figure imgf000023_0002
In another embodiment, the preceding process wherein the treating step comprises adding a solution of compound D in a water miscible solvent to a buffered solution containing the hydrolase enzyme at a rate which minimizes precipitation of the ester. In another embodiment the ester is added over a period of from about 24 hours to about 100 hours. In another embodiment the ester is added over a period of from about 48 hours to about 100 hours. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, Rg is methyl. In another embodiment, the embodiment of any one of the preceding embodiments wherein the hydrolase enzyme is an esterase is described. In another embodiment, the embodiment of any of the preceding embodiments wherein the esterase is a pig liver esterase is described.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula F, wherein R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating compound D with a trialkyltin hydroxide. In one illustrative embodiment, the trialkyltin hydroxide is trimethyltin hydroxide.
In an illustrative example, a solution of compound 4 in dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) is added over a period of 90 hours, to a buffered solution of pig liver esterase. In another illustrative example, the buffer is a phosphate buffer. In another illustrative example, the solution of the enzyme has a pH of 6.5 to 8.5. In another illustrative, example the solution of the enzyme has a pH of 7.4 to 7.8. It is appreciated that the buffering material used can be any buffer compatible with the hydrolase enzyme used to remove the ester.
Figure imgf000024_0001
In another illustrative example, a solution of methyl ester 6 and trimethyltin hydroxide in 1,2-dichloroethane was heated to yield acid 7.
Tripeptide methyl ester 6 (reported in an earlier patent application [1]) was treated with trimethyltin hydroxide to yield corresponding acid 7. The triethylsilyl group was removed by treatment with hydrogen flouride-triethyl amine complex, and acetylated, resulting in acety -tripeptide acid 8.
Figure imgf000024_0002
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula G, wherein R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating the silyl ether of compound F with a non-basic fluoride reagent. It has been discovered herein that use of basic conditions can lead to the production of a by-product arising from the rearrangement of the ester roup to give compound G'.
Figure imgf000025_0001
In an illustrative example, compound 7 is treated with Et N*3HF to cleave the TES-ether in the preparation of the corresponding alcohol 6'. It is to be understood that other non-basic fluoride reagents to cleave the silyl ether of compounds F may be used in the methods and processes described herein, including but not limited to pyridine»HF, and the like to cleave the TES-ether.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula AG, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound F with an alcohol, R12OH, where R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a transesterification catalyst. In one embodiment the transesterification catalyst is trifluoroacetic acid (TFA). In another embodiment, the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of
(Ri3)8Sn402(NCS)4, (Ri3)2Sn(OAc)2, (Ri3)2SnO, (Ri3)2SnCl2, (Ri3)2SnS, (Ri3)3SnOH, and (R13)3SnOSn(R1 ) , where R1 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted. In another embodiment, the catalyst is (R13)2SnO. Illustrative examples of R13 are methyl, n-butyl. n-octyl, phenyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p- MeO henyl, phenethyl,and benzyl.
Figure imgf000026_0001
It is to be understood that R2, R5, R6, R7, and R12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula BG, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R12 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound AF with a metal hydroxide or carbonate. Illustrative examples of a metal hydroxide or carbonate include LiOH, Li2C03, NaOH, Na2C03, KOH, K2C03, Ca(OH)2, CaC03, M OH)2, MgC03, and the like.
Figure imgf000026_0002
It is to be understood that R5, R6, R7, and R12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula H, wherein R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 and R4 are independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula G with an acylating agent of formula R4C(0)X2, where X2 is a leaving group. It is appreciated that the resulting product may contain varying amounts of the mixed anhydride of compound H and R4C02H. In another embodiment, the process described in the preceding embodiment further comprises the step of treating the reaction product with water to prepare H, free of or substantially free of anhydride. In another embodiment, the process of the preceding embodiments wherein X2 is R4C02, is described. In another embodiment, the process of any one of the preceding embodiments wherein R4 is C1-C4 alkyl is described. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R4 is methyl. In another embodiment, the process of any one of the preceding embodiments wherein R6 is sec -butyl is described. In another embodiment, the process of any one of the preceding embodiments wherein R7 is methyl is described. In another embodiment, the process of any one of the preceding embodiments wherein R5 is iso- pro l is described.
Figure imgf000027_0001
In an illustrative example, compound 6' is treated with acetic anhydride in pyridine. It has been discovered herein that shortening the time for this step of the process improves the yield of compound H by limiting the amount of the previously undescribed alternative acylation side products, such as formula 7a that are formed. It is appreciated that the resulting product may contain varying amounts of the mixed anhydride of 8 and acetic acid. In another embodiment, treatment of the reaction product resulting from the preceding step with water in dioxane yields compound 8, free of or substantially free of anhydride. It is to be understood that other solvents can be substituted for dioxane in the hydrolysis of the intermediate mixed anh dride. Alternatively, the step may be performed without solvent.
Figure imgf000027_0002
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a compound of formula AH, wherein R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R2 and R4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R12 is as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; wherein the process comprises the step of treating a compound of formula BG with an acylating agent of formula R4C(0)X2, where X2 is a leavin group.
Figure imgf000028_0001
It is to be understood that R4, R5, R6, and R7 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a process for preparing compound I is described.
Figure imgf000028_0002
where PG is a protecting group, LG is a leaving group, and Ar1; Ar2, L, and R3 are as described in any of the embodiments described herein.
In one illustrative example, mixed carbonate 11 was prepared from 4- nitropyridyldisulfide ethanol 12 and 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate as shown. Boc-Tut-hydrazide 13 was prepared from corresponding acid 10 and coupled with mixed carbonate 11 to yield activated Boc-Tut fragment 14.
Figure imgf000029_0001
77%
Figure imgf000029_0002
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a tubulysin linker derivative T, wherein Α is optionally substituted aryl; Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl; L is selected from the group consisting of
-(CR2)PCRARB-,
Figure imgf000029_0003
, and
where p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
RA, RB, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of RA, RB, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R3 is optionally substituted alkyl; R2 and R4 are independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
wherein the process comprises the steps of c) forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula H; and d) reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I.
Figure imgf000030_0001
In one embodiment, compound H is treated with an excess amount of active ester forming agent and pentafluorophenol to form the pentafluorophenol ester of compound H, followed by removal of the excess active ester forming agent prior to the addition of compound I. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, Α is phenyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, Α is substituted phenyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, Ar is 4-substituted phenyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, is RA- substituted phenyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, Ari is 4-hydroxyphenyl, or a hydroxyl protected form thereof. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, Ar2 is substituted pyridyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, Ar2 is substituted 2-pyridyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, Ar2 is 3-nitro-2-pyridyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R3 is methyl.
In an illustrative example, compound 8 is treated with an excess amount of a polymeric version of a carbodiimide and pentafluorophenol to form the pentafluorophenyl ester of 8, the polymeric carbodiimide is removed by filtration; and compound 9 is added to the solution to yield tubulysin B linker derivative 2. In another embodiment, the process of any one of the preceding embodiments wherein the polymeric carbodiimide is polystyrene-CH2- N=C=N-cyclohexane (PS-DCC) is described.
Figure imgf000031_0001
In another embodiment, the ether analog of compound 8 can be converted to the ether analog of compound 2, via the ether analog of compound 15, where R is allyl, or CH2(CH2)nCH3, and n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
:1 )
Figure imgf000032_0001
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a tubulysin linker derivative of formula (T2), wherein Ar is optionally substituted aryl; Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl; L is selected from the group consisting of
-(CR2)pCRaRb-,
Figure imgf000032_0002
where
p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
Ra, Rb, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of Ra, Rb, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
Ri is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or a pro-drug forming group; R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R3 is optionally substituted alkyl; R2 and R4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
wherein the process comprises the step of contacting compound T, with an alcohol, R12OH, where R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; and a
transesterification catalyst.
In one embodiment the transesterification catalyst is trifluoroacetic acid (TFA). In another embodiment, the transesterification catalyst is selected from the group consisting of (R13)8Sn402(NCS)4, (R13)2Sn(OAc)2, (Ri3)2SnO, (R13)2SnCl2, (Ri3)2SnS, (R13)3SnOH, and (R13)3SnOSn(R1 ) , where R1 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted. In another embodiment, the catalyst is (R13)2SnO. Illustrative examples of R13 are methyl, n-butyl, n-octyl, phenyl, o-MeO-phenyl, p-MeO-phenyl, phenethyl,and benzyl. It is to be understood that Ar1; Ar2, R1; R2, R^, R5, R6, R and R12 may each include conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
Figure imgf000033_0001
In another embodiment, a process is described for preparing a tubulysin linker derivative of formula (T2), wherein Αη is optionally substituted aryl; Ar2 is optionally substituted heteroaryl; L is selected from the group consisting of
-(CR2)pCRaRb-,
Figure imgf000033_0002
where p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
Ra, Rb, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of Ra, Rb, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
Ri is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or a pro-drug forming group; R5 and R6 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R3 is optionally substituted alkyl; R2 and R4 are as described in the various embodiments herein, such as being selected from optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
wherein the process comprises the step of forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula AH; and reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I to ive a compound of the formula AT.
Figure imgf000034_0001
It is to be understood that Ar1 ; Ar2, R1 ; R12, R3, R*, R5, R6, and R7 may each include
conventional protection groups on the optional substituents.
In another embodiment, a compound having formula D, wherein the compound is free of or substantially free of a compound having formula C- 1 is described, where in R2, R5, R6, R7, and Rg are as described in any of the embodiments described herein. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that compounds C- 1 are formed from the corresponding compounds C via an acyl transfer.
Figure imgf000035_0001
D C-1
In another embodiment, compound 4, free of or substantially free of compound 8a and/or compound iso-6 is described. In another embodiment, an optically pure form of compound 6 is formed.
Figure imgf000035_0002
In another embodiment, a compound F is described wherein R2, R5, R6, R7 and
Rg are as described in the any of the embodiments described herein.
Figure imgf000035_0003
In another embodiment, the compound having formula 7 is described.
Figure imgf000036_0001
In another embodiment a compound G, where the compound is free of or substantially free of a compound G' is described, wherein R2, R5, R6, and R7 are as described in any of the embodiments described herein.
Figure imgf000036_0002
In another embodiment, compound 6' is described, wherein compound 6' is free of or substantially free of the isomer of G' shown below
Figure imgf000036_0003
In another embodiment, compound 8 is described, wherein compound 8 is free of or substantially free of compound 8b is described
Figure imgf000036_0004
In another embodiment, a compound I is described wherein Ar1; Ar2, R3 and L are as described in any of the embodiments described herein.
Figure imgf000036_0005
In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, L is
-(CR2)pCRaRb-; where p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, ** indicates the attachment point to the carbonyl group, and * indicates the point of attachment to SAr2; Ra, Rb, and R are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of Ra, Rb, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring. In another embodiment of each of the embodiments described herein, Ra and Rb are hydrogen. In another embodiment of each of the embodiments described p is 1. In another embodiment of the foregoing embodiments and each additional embodiment described herein Ra and Rb are hydrogen and p is 1.
In another embodiment, a compound H is described wherein R4 is Me and R2, R5, R6, and R7 are as described in any of the embodiments described herein; and the compound H is free of or substantially free of the compound H wherein R4 and R2 are both Me.
Figure imgf000037_0001
In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R5 is isopropyl.
In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R6 is sec-butyl.
In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R8 is methyl.
In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R2 is CH2CH(CH3)2, CH2CH2CH3, CH2CH3, CH=C(CH3)2, or CH3.
In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, n is 3.
In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R7 is methyl.
In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R8 is methyl.
In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R4 is methyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, Ar is phenyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, Α is substituted phenyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, Ar is 4-substituted phenyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, An is RA- substituted phenyl. In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, Ari is 4-hydroxyphenyl, or a hydroxyl protected form thereof.
In another alternative of the foregoing embodiments, and each additional embodiment described herein, R3 is methyl.
Illustrative embodiments of the invention are further described by the following enumerated clauses:
1. A process for preparing a compound of the formula
Figure imgf000038_0001
or a salt or solvate thereof; wherein
Ari is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
L is selected from the group consisting of
-(CR2)PCRARB-,
Figure imgf000038_0002
where p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
RA, RB, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of RA, RB, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
X is hydrogen; or X is alkyl or alkenyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or X is R16C(0)CH(R17)CH2; where R17 is C(0)R16, C(0)OR16, or CN; where R16 is independently in each instance alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or X is CH2QR 18 ; where Q is N, O, or
S; and R 18 is alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, or
heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted, or R 18 is acyl, sulfonyl, or phosphonic acid or a derivative thereof;
R3 is optionally substituted alkyl;
R4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted;
and
n is 1, 2, 3, or 4;
wherein the process comprises
the step of treating a compound of formula A with triethylsilyl chloride and imidazole in an aprotic solvent where Rg is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000039_0001
the step of treating a compound of formula B with a base and a compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 in an aprotic solvent at a temperature from about -78°C to about 0°C; wherein the molar ratio of the compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 to the compound of formula B from about 1 to about 1.5, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000040_0001
or
the steps of
a) preparing a compound of formula (El) from a compound of formula (E), where is a leaving group
Figure imgf000040_0002
E E1
and
b) treating a compound of formula XC under reducing conditions presence of the compound of formula El, where Rg is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000040_0003
xc
or
the step of treating compound of formula XD with a hydrolase enzyme trialkyltin hydroxide, where Rg is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000040_0004
or
the step of treating a compound of formula XF with a non-basic fluoride reagent
Figure imgf000040_0005
XF
or the step of treating a compound of formula XG with an acylating agent of formula R4C(0)X2, where X2 is a leaving group
Figure imgf000041_0001
XG
or
the steps of
c) forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula XH
Figure imgf000041_0002
and
d) reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I
Figure imgf000041_0003
or combinations thereof.
1A. A rocess for preparing a compound of the formula
Figure imgf000041_0004
or a salt or solvate thereof; wherein
Ari is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl; Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl; L is selected from the group consisting of
-(CR2)pCRaRb-,
Figure imgf000041_0005
where p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
RA, RB, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of RA, RB, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
Y is acyloxy or R120;
R3 is optionally substituted alkyl;
R4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted;
and
n is 1, 2, 3, or 4;
wherein the process comprises
the step of treating a compound of formula A with triethylsilyl chloride and imidazole in an aprotic solvent where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000042_0001
or the step of treating a compound of formula B with a base and a compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 in an aprotic solvent at a temperature from about -78°C to about 0°C; wherein the molar ratio of the compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 to the compound of formula B from about 1 to about 1.5, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl R,
Figure imgf000043_0001
or
the steps of
a) preparing a compound of formula (El) from a compound of formula (E), where is a leaving group
Figure imgf000043_0002
E E1
and
b) treating a compound of formula C under reducing conditions in the presence of the compound of formula El, where Rg is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000043_0003
or
the step of treating compound of formula D with a hydrolase enzyme or with a trialkyltin hydroxide, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000043_0004
or
the step of treating a compound of formula Fl with a non-basic fluoride reagent
Figure imgf000043_0005
F 1
or the step of treating a compound of formula Gl with an acylating agent of formula R4C(0)X2, where X2 is a leaving group
Figure imgf000044_0001
G 1
or
the steps of
c) forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula HI
Figure imgf000044_0002
H 1
and
d) reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I
Figure imgf000044_0003
or combinations thereof.
IB. A process for preparing a compound of the formula
Figure imgf000044_0004
or a salt thereof, wherein
Ari is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl; Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl; L is selected from the group consisting of -(CR2)PCRaRb
Figure imgf000045_0001
, and
where p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and indicates the points of attachment;
Ra, Rb, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of Ra, Rb, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R3 is optionally substituted alkyl;
R4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; and
n is 1, 2, 3, or 4;
wherein the process comprises
the step of treating a compound of formula A with triethylsilyl chloride and imidazole in an aprotic solvent, where Rg is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000045_0002
or
the step of treating a compound of formula B with a base and a compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 in an aprotic solvent at a temperature from about -78°C to about 0°C; wherein the molar ratio of the compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 to the compound of formula B from about 1 to about 1.5, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000046_0001
B
or
the steps of
a) preparing a compound of formula (El) where is a leaving group from a compound of formula E
Figure imgf000046_0002
E E1
and
b) treating a compound of formula C under reducing conditions in the presence of the compound of fomiula EL, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000046_0003
or
the step of treating compound D with a hydrolase enzyme or with a trialkyltin hydroxide, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000046_0004
or
the step of treating the silyl ether of compound F with a non-basic fluoride reagent
Figure imgf000046_0005
or
the step of treating a compound of formula G with an acylating agent of formula R4C(0)X2, where X2 is a leaving group
Figure imgf000047_0001
or
the steps of
c) forming an active ester intermediate from a com ound of formula H
Figure imgf000047_0002
and
d) reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I
Figure imgf000047_0003
or combinations thereof.
1C. A rocess for preparing a compound of the formula
Figure imgf000047_0004
or a salt thereof, wherein
Ari is optionally substituted aryl;
Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
L is selected from the group consisting of -(CR2)PCRARB
Figure imgf000048_0001
, and
where p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
RA, RB, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of RA, RB, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted;
R3 is optionally substituted alkyl;
R4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; and
n is 1 , 2, 3, or 4;
wherein the process comprises
the step of treating a compound of formula A with triethylsilyl chloride and imidazole in an aprotic solvent, where R8 is C 1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000048_0002
or
the step of treating a compound of formula B with a base and a compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 in an aprotic solvent at a temperature from about -78°C to about 0°C; wherein the molar ratio of the compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 to the compound of formula B from about 1 to about 1.5, where Rg is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl R,
Figure imgf000049_0001
or
the steps of
a) preparing a compound of formula (El) where Xi is a leaving group from a compound of formula E
R7 O R7 O
E E1
and
b) treating a compound of formula C under reducing conditions in the presence of the compound of formula EL, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000049_0002
the step of treating compound D with a hydrolase enzyme or with a trialkyltin hydroxide, where Rg is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000049_0003
or
the step of contacting compound D with an alcohol R12OH; and a transesterification reagent selected from TFA or (R13)gSn402(NCS)4, (Ri3)2Sn(OAc)2, (Ri3)2SnO, (Ri3)2SnCl2, (Ri3)2SnS, (Ri3)3SnOH, or (R13)3SnOSn(R13)3, where R13 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted
or
the step of contactin compound AF with water and an alkaline salt;
Figure imgf000050_0001
or
the step of treating a compound of formula BG with an acylating agent of formula R4C(0)X2, where X2 is a leaving group
Figure imgf000050_0002
or
the steps of
cl) forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula AH
Figure imgf000050_0003
and
dl) reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I
Figure imgf000050_0004
.
or combinations thereof.
ID. A compound of the formula
Figure imgf000050_0005
or a salt or solvate thereof; wherein
Ari is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
L is selected from the group consisting of
-(CR2)PCRARB-,
Figure imgf000051_0001
where p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
RA, RB, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of RA, RB, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
R3 is optionally substituted alkyl; and
R9 is hydrogen or an amine protecting group.
IE. A com ound of the formula
Figure imgf000051_0002
or a salt thereof, wherein
Ari is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
L is selected from the group consisting of
-(CR2)PCRARB-,
Figure imgf000051_0003
where p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
RA, RB, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of RA, RB, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring; RAT represents hydrogen, or 1 to 4 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of amino or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and heteroarylheteroalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted;
Y is R2C(0)0 or R120;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R3 is optionally substituted alkyl;
R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted;
RAT represents hydrogen, or 1 to 4 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of amino or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and heteroarylheteroalkyl; and n is 1, 2, 3, or 4.
IF. The process or compound of any one of the previous clauses wherein Y is acyloxy.
IG. The process or compound of any one of the previous clauses wherein Y is R2C(0)0, where R2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl.
IH. The process or compound of any one of the previous clauses wherein Y is R120, where R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted. 2. The process of any one of the previous clauses comprising the step of treating a compound of formula A with triethylsilyl chloride and imidazole in an aprotic solvent, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000053_0001
3. The process of any one of the previous clauses comprising the step of treating a compound of formula B with a base and a compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 in an aprotic solvent at a temperature from about -78°C to about 0°C; wherein the molar ratio of the compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 to the compound of formula B from about 1 to about 1.5, where Rg is C1-C6 unbranched alk l
Figure imgf000053_0002
4. The process of any one of the previous clauses comprising the steps of a) preparing a compound of formula (El) from a compound of formula E, where Xi is a leaving group
Figure imgf000053_0003
and
b) treating a compound of formula C under reducing conditions in the presence of the compound of formula El, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000053_0004
5. The process of any one of the previous clauses comprising the step of treating compound D with a hydrolase enzyme or a trialkyltin hydroxide, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000054_0001
5A The process of any one of the previous clauses comprising the step of contacting compound D with an alcohol R12OH; and a transesterification reagent selected from (Ri3)8Sn402(NCS)4, (Ri3)2Sn(OAc)2, (Ri3)2SnO, (Ri3)2SnCl2, (Ri3)2SnS, (Ri3)3SnOH, (R13)3SnOSn(R13)3, or a combination thereof, where R13 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
5B. The process of any one of the previous clauses comprising the step of contacting compound AF with water and an alkaline salt;
Figure imgf000054_0002
6. The process of any one of the previous clauses comprising the step of treating a compound of formula Gl with an acylating agent of formula R4C(0)X2, where X2 is a leaving group
Figure imgf000054_0003
G 1
6A. The process of any one of the previous clauses comprising the step of treating a compound of formula G with an acylating agent of formula R4C(0)X2, where X2 is a leaving group
Figure imgf000054_0004
6B. The process of any one of the previous clauses comprising the step treating a compound of formula BG with with an acylating agent of formula R4C(0)X2, where X2 is a leaving group
Figure imgf000055_0001
The process of any one of the previous clauses comprising the steps ) forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula HI
Figure imgf000055_0002
H 1
and
d) reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I
Figure imgf000055_0003
7A. The process of any one of the previous clauses comprising the steps c) forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula H
Figure imgf000055_0004
and
d) reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I
Figure imgf000055_0005
7B. The process of any one of the previous clauses comprising the steps of c) forming an active ester intermediate from a com ound of formula AH
Figure imgf000055_0006
and
d) reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I
NH2 R3 M O Ar2
8. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein R2 is C1-C8 alkyl or C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
9. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
R2 is n-butyl.
10. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein R3 is C1-C4 alkyl.
11. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
R is methyl.
12. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ari is optionally substituted aryl.
12A. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ari is phenyl or hydroxyphenyl.
13. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ari is 4-hydroxyphenyl.
14. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein R4 is C1-C8 alkyl or C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
15. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
R4 is methyl.
16. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein R5 is branched C3-C6 or C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
17. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein R5 is iso-propyl.
18. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein R6 is branched C3-C6 or C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
19. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
R5 is sec -butyl.
20. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
R7 is C1-C6 alkyl. 21. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
R7 is methyl.
22. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ar2 is optionally substituted heteroaryl.
22A. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
Ar2 is substituted pyridyl.
23. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ar2 is substituted 2-pyridyl.
24. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ar2 is 3-nitro-2-pyridyl.
25. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein R2 is CH2CH(CH3)2, CH2CH2CH3, CH2CH3, CH=C(CH3)2, or CH3.
26. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ari is substituted phenyl.
27. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ari is 4-substituted phenyl.
28. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ari is RA- substituted phenyl.
29. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ari is 4-hydroxyphenyl, or a hydroxyl protected form thereof.
30. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L is -(CR2)PCRARB-.
The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L is -(CR2)PCRARB-, p is 1, and each of RA and RB is methyl.
The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L is
Figure imgf000057_0001
32. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L is
Figure imgf000057_0002
32A. The process or compound of any one of clauses 1 to 7 wherein O-L-S is
0-(CR2)PCRaRb-S.
32B. The process or compound of any one of clauses 1 to 7 wherein O-L-S is
Figure imgf000058_0001
32C. The process or compound of any one of clauses 1 to 7 wherein O-L-S is
Figure imgf000058_0002
33. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ra and Rb are each hydrogen.
34. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein p is 1.
35. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein m is 1.
35A. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the transesterification catalyst is selected from (R13)8Sn402(NCS)4, (R13)2Sn(OAc)2, (R1 )2SnO, (R13)2SnCl2, (R13)2SnS, (R13)3SnOH, and (R13)3SnOSn(R13)3, where R13 is independently selected from alkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, or cycloalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
35B. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the transesterification catalyst is (R1 )2SnO.
35C. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the transesterification catalyst is (n-Bu)2SnO.
35D. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the transesterification catalyst is TFA.
35E. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the alkaline salt is a metal hydroxide or a metal carbonate.
35F. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the alkaline salt is selected from LiOH, Li2C03, NaOH, Na2C03, KOH, K2C03, Ca(OH)2, CaC03, Mg(OH)2, or MgC03.
36. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein the alkaline salt is LiOH. 37. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ar2 is substituted pyridyl.
38. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ar2 is substituted 2-pyridyl.
39. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
Ar2 is 3-nitro-2-pyridyl.
40. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein R2 is CH2CH(CH3)2, CH2CH2CH3, CH2CH3, CH=C(CH3)2, or CH3.
41. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ar is substituted phenyl.
42. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Α is 4-substituted phenyl.
43. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ar is RA- substituted phenyl.
44. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Α is 4-hydroxyphenyl, or a hydroxyl protected form thereof.
45. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L is -(CR2)PCRARB-.
46. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L is
Figure imgf000059_0001
47. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein L is
Figure imgf000059_0002
47A. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
O-L-S is 0-(CR2)PCRARB-S.
47B. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
O-L-S is
Figure imgf000060_0001
47C. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
Figure imgf000060_0002
48. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
Ra and Rb are each hydrogen.
49. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein p is 1.
50. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein m is 1.
50A. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein each R is hydrogen.
51. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein R2 is CH2CH(CH3)2, CH2CH2CH3, CH2CH3, CH=C(CH3)2, or CH3.
52. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
Ra is hydrogen and Rb is methyl.
52A. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein R is hydrogen.
53. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ra and Rb are each methyl.
54. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ra and Rb are taken together with the attached carbon to form cyclopropyl.
55. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ra is hydrogen and Rb is methyl.
55A. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein
Ra and Rb are each methyl.
55B. The process or compound of any one of the preceding clauses wherein Ra and Rb are taken together with the attached carbon to form cyclopropyl.
56. A process for preparing a compound of the formula
Figure imgf000061_0001
wherein
Ari is optionally substituted aryl;
Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
L is selected from the group consisting of
-(CR2)pCRaRb-,
Figure imgf000061_0002
, where p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
Ra, Rb, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of Ra, Rb, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,
heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
where X is hydrogen or alkyl, including C1-6 alkyl and C1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, including C2_6 alkenyl and C2_4 alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or
heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or CH2QR9; where Q is NH, O, or S; or; and R9 is alkyl, including Ci_6 alkyl and C1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, including C2_6 alkenyl and C2_4 alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or R9 is hydrogen or C(0)R10, where R10 is Q-6 alkyl, C2_6 alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or R9 is C(0)R20,
S(0)2R 20 , or P(0)(OR 20 )2; where R 20 is independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of H, alkyl, including C1-6 alkyl and C1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, including C2_6 alkenyl and C2-4 alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or R 20 is a metal cation;
R3 is optionally substituted alkyl;
R4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R7 is optionally substituted alkyl; and
n is 1, 2, 3, or 4;
wherein the process comprises
the step of treating a compound of formula A with triethylsilyl chloride and imidazole in an aprotic solvent, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000062_0001
or
the step of treating a compound of formula B with a base and a compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 in an aprotic solvent at a temperature from about -78°C to about 0°C; wherein the molar ratio of the compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 to the compound of formula B from about 1 to about 1.5, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000062_0002
B
or
the steps of
a) preparing a compound of formula (El) where is a leaving group from a compound of formula E
Figure imgf000062_0003
E E1
and b) treating a compound of formula C under reducing conditions in the presence of the compound of formula El, where Rg is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000063_0001
or
the step of treating compound D with a hydrolase enzyme or with a trialkyltin hydroxide, where Rg is C1-C6 unbranched alk l
Figure imgf000063_0002
or
the step of treating the silyl ether of compound F with a non-basic fluoride reagent
Figure imgf000063_0003
or
the step of treating a compound of formula G with an acylating agent of formula R4C(0)X2, where X2 is a leaving group
Figure imgf000063_0004
or
the steps of
c) forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula H
Figure imgf000064_0001
d) reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I
Figure imgf000064_0002
or combinations thereof.
57. The process of clause 56 wherein X is CH2QR9A; where Q is NH, O, or S; and R9A is alkyl, including C1-6 alkyl and C1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, including C2-6 alkenyl and C2-4 alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or R9A is H or C(0)R10, where R10 is C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
58. The process of clause 56 wherein X is CH2QR9A; where Q is O; and R9A is alkyl, including C1-6 alkyl and C1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, including C2-6 alkenyl and C2-4 alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or R9A is H or C(0)R10, where R10 is Ci_6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
59. The process of clause 56 wherein X is CH2QR ; where Q is NH, O, or S; and R9B is C(0)R20, S(0)2R20, or P(O)(OR20)2; where R20 is independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of H, alkyl, including C1-6 alkyl and C1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, including C2-6 alkenyl and C2-4 alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or
heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or R 20 is a metal cation.
60. The process of clause 56 wherein X is CH2QR ; where Q is O; and R is C(0)R20, S(0)2R20, or P(O)(OR20)2; where R20 is independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of H, alkyl, including C1-6 alkyl and C1-4 alkyl, alkenyl, including C2- 6 alkenyl and C2-4 alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or R 20 is a metal cation. 61. The process of clause 56 wherein X is CH2QR ; where Q is NH; and
R 9B is C(0)R 20 , where R 20 is alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or arylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
62. The process of clause 56 wherein X is CH2CH=CHR 22 or CH2C(R22)=CH2, where R22 is C(0)R20, where R20 is wherein R22 is alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or arylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
63. The process of clause 56 wherein X is CH2CH(Ra)C(0)R23, where R23 is H, or alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or arylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; Ra is C(0)R9, C(0)OR9 or CN;
64. The process of clause 56 wherein X is CH2OR 25 ; where R 25 is H, and alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or R 25 is alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted; or R 25 is alkyl.
65. The process of clause 56 wherein X is CH2OH.
66. The process of clause 56 wherein X is CH2X 3 ; where X 3 is halogen, including bromo or iodo, OS(0)2R24, OP(0)(OR24)R24, or OP(0)(OR24)2; where R24 is independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of H, and alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted, and metal cations.
In one embodiment, one or more of the following intermediates can be used to prepare a tubulysin, tubul sin conjugate, and/or a tubulysin linker compound.
Figure imgf000065_0001
Figure imgf000066_0001
R
where R' is Me or R, and R is allyl, or CH2(CH2)2CH3, where n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 and Ar2 is as described in various embodiments described herein.
In another embodiment, processes for preparing tubulysin conjugates are described herein. In one aspect, the processes include the step of reacting compounds (2) and the corresponding tubulysins described herein that include a 3-nitropyridin-2-ylthio activating group (AT2), such as compounds of the formulae
Figure imgf000067_0001
or salt and/or solvates thereof, as described herein, with a binding ligand- linker intermediate, such as are described in WO 2008/112873, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. In another aspect, the processes include acetonitrile as a reaction solvent. In another aspect, the processes include aqueous phosphate as a reaction medium buffer. Without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that the use of acetonitrile as a solvent leads to a more rapid homogenous reaction solution. In addition, though without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that a more rapidly formed homogenous reaction medium may improve the yield and rate at which tubulysin conjugates described herein are formed. In addition, though without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that the use of 3-nitropyridin-2-ylthio activating groups may lead to faster reaction times. In addition, though without being bound by theory, it is believed herein that the use of 3-nitropyridin-2-ylthio activating groups may provide better chromatographic separation between the product tubulysin conjugates and the by-product 3-nitropyridin-2-ylthiol compared to conventional pyridin-2-ylthio activating groups. In addition, such better chromatographic separation may allow the use of alternative purification methods. For example, in addition to preparative HPLC, the tubulysin conjugates described herein may be purified by rapid pass-through chromatography methods, such as flash Ci g chromatography, Biotage™ Ci g chromatography systems, and the like. Additional methods and processes useful for performing the above processes are found in U.S. Patent Appl. Ser. No. 12/739,579, published as U.S. Application Publication No. 2010/0240701, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
It is to be understood that as used herein, the term tubulysin refers both collectively and individually to the naturally occurring tubulysins, and the analogs and derivatives of tubulysins. Illustrative examples of a tubulysin are shown in Table 1.
As used herein, the term tubulysin linker derivatives generally refers to the compounds described herein and analogs and derivatives thereof. It is also to be understood that in each of the foregoing, any corresponding pharmaceutically acceptable salt is also included in the illustrative embodiments described herein.
It is to be understood that such derivatives may include prodrugs of the compounds described herein, compounds described herein that include one or more protection or protecting groups, including compounds that are used in the preparation of other compounds described herein.
In addition, as used herein the term tubulysin linker derivatives also refers to prodrug derivatives of the compounds described herein, and including prodrugs of the various analogs and derivatives thereof. In addition, as used herein, the term tubulysin linker derivatives refers to both the amorphous as well as any and all morphological forms of each of the compounds described herein. In addition, as used herein, the term tubulysin linker derivatives refers to any and all hydrates, or other solvates, of the compounds described herein.
It is to be understood that each of the foregoing embodiments may be combined in chemically relevant ways to generate subsets of the embodiments described herein.
Accordingly, it is to be further understood that all such subsets are also illustrative
embodiments of the invention described herein.
The compounds described herein may contain one or more chiral centers, or may otherwise be capable of existing as multiple stereoisomers. It is to be understood that in one embodiment, the invention described herein is not limited to any particular stereochemical requirement, and that the compounds, and compositions, methods, uses, and medicaments that include them may be optically pure, or may be any of a variety of stereoisomeric mixtures, including racemic and other mixtures of enantiomers, other mixtures of diastereomers, and the like. It is also to be understood that such mixtures of stereoisomers may include a single stereochemical configuration at one or more chiral centers, while including mixtures of stereochemical configuration at one or more other chiral centers. Similarly, the compounds described herein may include geometric centers, such as cis, trans, (E)-, and (Z)- double bonds. It is to be understood that in another embodiment, the invention described herein is not limited to any particular geometric isomer requirement, and that the compounds, and compositions, methods, uses, and medicaments that include them may be pure, or may be any of a variety of geometric isomer mixtures. It is also to be understood that such mixtures of geometric isomers may include a single configuration at one or more double bonds, while including mixtures of geometry at one or more other double bonds.
As used herein, the term aprotic solvent refers to a solvent which does not yield a proton to the solute(s) under reaction conditions. Illustrative examples of nonprotic solvents are tetrahydrofuran (THF), 2,5-dimethyl-tetrahydrofuran, 2-methyl-tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydropyran, diethyl ether, t-butyl methyl ether, dimethyl formamide, N-methylpyrrolidinone (NMP), and the like. It is appreciated that mixtures of these solvents may also be used in the processes described herein.
As used herein, an equivalent amount of a reagent refers to the theoretical amount of the reagent necessary to transform a starting material into a desired product, i.e. if 1 mole of reagent is theoretically required to transform 1 mole of the starting material into 1 mole of product, then 1 equivalent of the reagent represents 1 mole of the reagent; if X moles of reagent are theoretically required to convert 1 mole of the starting material into 1 mole of product, then 1 equivalent of reagent represents X moles of reagent.
As used herein, the term active ester forming agent generally refers to any reagent or combinations of reagents that may be used to convert a carboxylic acid into an active ester.
As used herein, the term active ester generally refers to a carboxylic acid ester compound wherein the divalent oxygen portion of the ester is a leaving group resulting in an ester that is activated for reacting with compounds containing functional groups, such as amines, alcohols or sulfhydryl groups. Illustrative examples of active ester-forming
compounds are N-hydroxysuccinimide, N-hydroxyphthalimide, phenols substituted with electron withdrawing groups, such as but not limited to 4-nitrophenol, pentafluorophenol, Ν,Ν'-disubstituted isoureas, substituted hydroxyheteroaryls, such as but not limited to 2- pyridinols, 1-hydroxybenzotriazoles, l-hydroxy-7-aza-benzotriazoles, cyanomethanol, and the like. Illustratively, the reaction conditions for displacing the active ester with a compound having an amino, hydroxy or thiol group are mild. Illustratively, the reaction conditions for displacing the active ester with a compound having an amino, hydroxy or thiol group are performed at ambient or below ambient temperatures. Illustratively, the reaction conditions for displacing the active ester with a compound having an amino, hydroxy or thiol group are performed without the addition of a strong base. Illustratively, the reaction conditions for displacing the active ester with a compound having an amino, hydroxy or thiol group are performed with the addition of a tertiary amine base, such as a tertiary amine base having a conjugate acid pKa of about 11 or less, about 10.5 or less, and the like.
As used herein, the term "alkyl" includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched. As used herein, the term "alkenyl" and "alkynyl" includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, and includes at least one double bond or triple bond, respectively. It is to be understood that alkynyl may also include one or more double bonds. It is to be further understood that in certain embodiments, alkyl is advantageously of limited length, including Q-C^, C\-Cn, Q-Cg, C -C , and C C*. It is to be further understood that in certain embodiments alkenyl and/or alkynyl may each be advantageously of limited length, including C2-C24, C2-C12, C2-C8, C2-C6, and C2-C4. It is appreciated herein that shorter alkyl, alkenyl, and/or alkynyl groups may add less lipophilicity to the compound and accordingly will have different pharmacokinetic behavior. Illustrative alkyl groups are, but not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, 2- pentyl, 3-pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl and the like.
As used herein, the term "cycloalkyl" includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, where at least a portion of the chain in cyclic. It is to be understood that cycloalkylalkyl is a subset of cycloalkyl. It is to be understood that cycloalkyl may be polycyclic. Illustrative cycloalkyl include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 2-methylcyclopropyl, cyclopentyleth-2-yl, adamantyl, and the like. As used herein, the term "cycloalkenyl" includes a chain of carbon atoms, which is optionally branched, and includes at least one double bond, where at least a portion of the chain in cyclic. It is to be understood that the one or more double bonds may be in the cyclic portion of cycloalkenyl and/or the non-cyclic portion of cycloalkenyl. It is to be understood that cycloalkenylalkyl and cycloalkylalkenyl are each subsets of cycloalkenyl. It is to be understood that cycloalkyl may be polycyclic. Illustrative cycloalkenyl include, but are not limited to, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexylethen-2-yl, cycloheptenylpropenyl, and the like. It is to be further understood that chain forming cycloalkyl and/or cycloalkenyl is advantageously of limited length, including C3-C24, C3-C12, C3-Cg, C3-C6, and C5-C6. It is appreciated herein that shorter alkyl and/or alkenyl chains forming cycloalkyl and/or cycloalkenyl, respectively, may add less lipophilicity to the compound and accordingly will have different pharmacokinetic behavior.
As used herein, the term "heteroalkyl" includes a chain of atoms that includes both carbon and at least one heteroatom, and is optionally branched. Illustrative heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In certain variations, illustrative heteroatoms also include phosphorus, and selenium. As used herein, the term "cycloheteroalkyl" including heterocyclyl and heterocycle, includes a chain of atoms that includes both carbon and at least one heteroatom, such as heteroalkyl, and is optionally branched, where at least a portion of the chain is cyclic. Illustrative heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In certain variations, illustrative heteroatoms also include phosphorus, and selenium. Illustrative cycloheteroalkyl include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl,
tetrahydropyranyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, quinuclidinyl, and the like.
As used herein, the term "aryl" includes monocyclic and polycyclic aromatic groups, including aromatic carbocyclic and aromatic heterocyclic groups, each of which may be optionally substituted. As used herein, the term "carbaryl" includes aromatic carbocyclic groups, each of which may be optionally substituted. Illustrative aromatic carbocyclic groups described herein include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, and the like. As used herein, the term "heteroaryl" includes aromatic heterocyclic groups, each of which may be optionally substituted. Illustrative aromatic heterocyclic groups include, but are not limited to, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, tetrazinyl, quinolinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, thienyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, triazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzthiazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, and the like.
As used herein, the term "amino" includes the group NH2, alkylamino, and dialkylamino, where the two alkyl groups in dialkylamino may be the same or different, i.e. alkylalkylamino. Illustratively, amino includes methylamino, ethylamino, dimethylamino, methylethylamino, and the like. In addition, it is to be understood that when amino modifies or is modified by another term, such as aminoalkyl, or acylamino, the above variations of the term amino are included therein. Illustratively, aminoalkyl includes H2N-alkyl, methylaminoalkyl, ethylaminoalkyl, dimethylaminoalkyl, methylethylaminoalkyl, and the like. Illustratively, acylamino includes acylmethylamino, acylethylamino, and the like.
As used herein, the term "amino and derivatives thereof includes amino as described herein, and alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, heteroalkylamino, heteroalkenylamino, heteroalkynylamino, cycloalkylamino, cycloalkenylamino, cycloheteroalkylamino, cycloheteroalkenylamino, arylamino, arylalkylamino,
arylalkenylamino, arylalkynylamino, acylamino, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted. The term "amino derivative" also includes urea, carbamate, and the like.
As used herein, the term "hydroxy and derivatives thereof includes OH, and alkyloxy, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, heteroalkyloxy, heteroalkenyloxy, heteroalkynyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, cycloalkenyloxy, cycloheteroalkyloxy, cycloheteroalkenyloxy, aryloxy, arylalkyloxy, arylalkenyloxy, arylalkynyloxy, acyloxy, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted. The term "hydroxy derivative" also includes carbamate, and the like.
As used herein, the term "thio and derivatives thereof includes SH, and alkylthio, alkenylthio, alkynylthio, heteroalkylthio, heteroalkenylthio, heteroalkynylthio, cycloalkylthio, cycloalkenylthio, cycloheteroalkylthio, cycloheteroalkenylthio, arylthio, arylalkylthio, arylalkenylthio, arylalkynylthio, acylthio, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted. The term "thio derivative" also includes thiocarbamate, and the like.
As used herein, the term "acyl" includes formyl, and alkylcarbonyl, alkenylcarbonyl, alkynylcarbonyl, heteroalkylcarbonyl, heteroalkenylcarbonyl,
heteroalkynylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, cycloalkenylcarbonyl, cycloheteroalkylcarbonyl, cycloheteroalkenylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, arylalkylcarbonyl, arylalkenylcarbonyl, arylalkynylcarbonyl, acylcarbonyl, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted.
As used herein, the term "sulfonyl" includes alkylsulfonyl, alkenylsulfonyl, alkynylsulfonyl, heteroalkylsulfonyl, heteroalkenylsulfonyl, heteroalkynylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfonyl, cycloalkenylsulfonyl, cycloheteroalkylsulfonyl,
cycloheteroalkenylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, arylalkylsulfonyl, arylalkenylsulfonyl,
arylalkynylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, heteroarylalkylsulfonyl, heteroarylalkenylsulfonyl, heteroarylalkynylsulfonyl, acylsulfonyl, and the like, each of which is optionally substituted.
As used herein, the term "phosphonic acid or a derivative thereof includes PO3H2 and salts thereof, and esters and amides thereof.
As used herein, the term "carboxylate and derivatives thereof includes the group C02H and salts thereof, and esters and amides thereof, and CN.
The term "optionally substituted" as used herein includes the replacement of hydrogen atoms with other functional groups on the radical that is optionally substituted. Such other functional groups illustratively include, but are not limited to, amino, hydroxyl, halo, thiol, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and the like. Illustratively, any of amino, hydroxyl, thiol, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, and/or sulfonic acid is optionally substituted.
As used herein, the term "optionally substituted aryl" includes the replacement of hydrogen atoms with other functional groups on the aryl that is optionally substituted. Such other functional groups illustratively include, but are not limited to, amino, hydroxyl, halo, thiol, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof, and the like. Illustratively, any of amino, hydroxyl, thiol, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, and/or sulfonic acid is optionally substituted.
Illustrative substituents include, but are not limited to, a radical -(CH2)xZ , where x is an integer from 0-6 and Z is selected from halogen, hydroxy, alkanoyloxy, including C -C alkanoyloxy, optionally substituted aroyloxy, alkyl, including C -C alkyl, alkoxy, including CrC6 alkoxy, cycloalkyl, including C3-C8 cycloalkyl, cycloalkoxy, including C3-C8 cycloalkoxy, alkenyl, including C2-C6 alkenyl, alkynyl, including C2-C6 alkynyl, haloalkyl, including C -C haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, including C -C haloalkoxy, halocycloalkyl, including C3-C8 halocycloalkyl, halocycloalkoxy, including C3-C8 halocycloalkoxy, amino, C - Ce alkylamino, (CrC6 alkyl)(Ci-C6 alkyl)amino, alkylcarbonylamino, N-(CrC6
alkyl)alkylcarbonylamino, aminoalkyl, CrC6 alkylaminoalkyl, (CrC6 alkyl)(Ci-C6
alkyl)aminoalkyl, alkylcarbonylaminoalkyl, N-(Ci-C6 alkyl)alkylcarbonylaminoalkyl, cyano, and nitro; or Zx is selected from -C02R4 and -CONR5R6, where R4, R5, and R6 are each independently selected in each occurrence from hydrogen, CrC6 alkyl, and aryl-C C6 alkyl.
The term protecting group generally refers to chemical functional groups that can be selectively appended to and removed from functionality, such as amine groups, present in a chemical compound to render such functionality inert to chemical reaction conditions to which the compound is exposed. See. e.g., Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1991. Numerous amine protecting groups are known in the art. Illustrative examples include the benzyloxycarbonyl (CBz), chlorobenzyloxycarbonyl, t-butyloxycarbonyl (Boc), fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (Fmoc), isonicotinyloxycarbonyl (i-Noc) groups.
The term "prodrug" as used herein generally refers to any compound that when administered to a biological system generates a biologically active compound as a result of one or more spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme-catalyzed chemical reaction(s), and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s), or a combination thereof. In vivo, the prodrug is typically acted upon by an enzyme (such as esterases, amidases, phosphatases, and the like), simple biological chemistry, or other process in vivo to liberate or regenerate the more pharmacologically active drug. This activation may occur through the action of an endogenous host enzyme or a non- endogenous enzyme that is administered to the host preceding, following, or during
administration of the prodrug. Additional details of prodrug use are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,627,165; and Pathalk et al., Enzymic protecting group techniques in organic synthesis, Stereosel. Biocatal. 775-797 (2000). It is appreciated that the prodrug is advantageously converted to the original drug as soon as the goal, such as targeted delivery, safety, stability, and the like is achieved, followed by the subsequent rapid elimination of the released remains of the group forming the prodrug.
Prodrugs may be prepared from the compounds described herein by attaching groups that ultimately cleave in vivo to one or more functional groups present on the compound, such as -OH-, -SH, -C02H, -NR2. Illustrative prodrugs include but are not limited to carboxylate esters where the group is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, acyloxyalkyl,
alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl as well as esters of hydroxyl, thiol and amines where the group attached is an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, phosphate or sulfate. Illustrative esters, also referred to as active esters, include but are not limited to 1-indanyl, N- oxysuccinimide; acyloxyalkyl groups such as acetoxymethyl, pivaloyloxymethyl,
β-acetoxyethyl, β-pivaloyloxyethyl, l-(cyclohexylcarbonyloxy)prop-l-yl, (1
-aminoethyl)carbonyloxymethyl, and the like; alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl groups, such as ethoxycarbonyloxymethyl, a-ethoxycarbonyloxyethyl, β-ethoxycarbonyloxyethyl, and the like; dialkylaminoalkyl groups, including di-lower alkylamino alkyl groups, such as
dimethylaminomethyl, dimethylaminoethyl, diethylaminomethyl, diethylaminoethyl, and the like; 2-(alkoxycarbonyl)-2-alkenyl groups such as 2-(isobutoxycarbonyl) pent-2-enyl,
2-(ethoxycarbonyl)but-2-enyl, and the like; and lactone groups such as phthalidyl,
dimethoxyphthalidyl, and the like.
Further illustrative prodrugs contain a chemical moiety, such as an amide or phosphorus group functioning to increase solubility and/or stability of the compounds described herein. Further illustrative prodrugs for amino groups include, but are not limited to, (C3-C2o)alkanoyl; halo-(C3-C2o)alkanoyl; (C3-C2o)alkenoyl; (C4-C7)cycloalkanoyl; (C3-C6)- cycloalkyl(C2-C16)alkanoyl; optionally substituted aroyl, such as unsubstituted aroyl or aroyl substituted by 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, trifluoromethanesulphonyloxy, (Ci-C3)alkyl and (CrC^alkoxy, each of which is optionally further substituted with one or more of 1 to 3 halogen atoms; optionally substituted aryl(C2- Ci6)alkanoyl, such as the aryl radical being unsubstituted or substituted by 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, (Ci-C3)alkyl and (Ci-C3)alkoxy, each of which is optionally further substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms; and optionally substituted heteroarylalkanoyl having one to three heteroatoms selected from O, S and N in the heteroaryl moiety and 2 to 10 carbon atoms in the alkanoyl moiety, such as the heteroaryl radical being unsubstituted or substituted by 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, trifluoromethanesulphonyloxy, (CrC^alkyl, and (Ci-C3)alkoxy, each of which is optionally further substituted with 1 to 3 halogen atoms. The groups illustrated are exemplary, not exhaustive, and may be prepared by conventional processes.
It is understood that the prodrugs themselves may not possess significant biological activity, but instead undergo one or more spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme-catalyzed chemical reaction(s), and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s), or a
combination thereof after administration in vivo to produce the compound described herein that is biologically active or is a precursor of the biologically active compound. However, it is appreciated that in some cases, the prodrug is biologically active. It is also appreciated that prodrugs may often serves to improve drug efficacy or safety through improved oral bioavailability, pharmacodynamic half-life, and the like. Prodrugs also refer to derivatives of the compounds described herein that include groups that simply mask undesirable drug properties or improve drug delivery. For example, one or more compounds described herein may exhibit an undesirable property that is advantageously blocked or minimized may become pharmacological, pharmaceutical, or pharmacokinetic barriers in clinical drug application, such as low oral drug absorption, lack of site specificity, chemical instability, toxicity, and poor patient acceptance (bad taste, odor, pain at injection site, and the like), and others. It is appreciated herein that a prodrug, or other strategy using reversible derivatives, can be useful in the optimization of the clinical application of a drug.
As used herein, the term "treating", "contacting" or "reacting" when referring to a chemical reaction means to add or mix two or more reagents under appropriate conditions to produce the indicated and/or the desired product. It should be appreciated that the reaction which produces the indicated and/or the desired product may not necessarily result directly from the combination of two reagents which were initially added, i.e., there may be one or more intermediates which are produced in the mixture which ultimately leads to the formation of the indicated and/or the desired product.
As used herein, the term "composition" generally refers to any product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combinations of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts. It is to be understood that the compositions described herein may be prepared from isolated compounds described herein or from salts, solutions, hydrates, solvates, and other forms of the compounds described herein. It is also to be understood that the compositions may be prepared from various amorphous, non-amorphous, partially crystalline, crystalline, and/or other morphological forms of the compounds described herein. It is also to be understood that the compositions may be prepared from various hydrates and/or solvates of the compounds described herein. Accordingly, such pharmaceutical compositions that recite compounds described herein are to be understood to include each of, or any combination of, the various morphological forms and/or solvate or hydrate forms of the compounds described herein. Illustratively, compositions may include one or more carriers, diluents, and/or excipients. The compounds described herein, or compositions containing them, may be formulated in a therapeutically effective amount in any conventional dosage forms appropriate for the methods described herein. The compounds described herein, or compositions containing them, including such formulations, may be administered by a wide variety of conventional routes for the methods described herein, and in a wide variety of dosage formats, utilizing known procedures (see generally, Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, (21st ed., 2005)).
Figure imgf000076_0001
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of Dipeptide 5. 4.9 g of dipeptide 3 (11.6 mmol) was dissolved in 60 mL dichloromethane, imidazole (0.87g, 12.7 mmol) was added to the resulting solution at 0°C. The reaction mixture was warmed slightly to dissolve all solids and re-cooled to 0°C. TESC1 (2.02 mL, 12.1 mmol) was added drop-wise at 0°C, the reaction mixture was stirred under argon and warmed to room temperature over 2 h. TLC (3: 1 hexanes/EtOAc) showed complete conversion. The reaction was filtered to remove the imidazole HC1 salt, extracted with de-ionized water, and the aqueous phase was back- washed with dichloromethane, the combined organic phase was washed with brine, dried over Na2S04, filtered to remove the Na2S04, concentrated under reduced pressure, co-evaporated with toluene and dried under high-vacuum overnight to give 6.4 g of crude product 4 (vs 5.9 g of theoretical yield).
The crude product 4 was co-evaporated with toluene again and used without further purification. TES protected dipeptide was dissolved in 38 mL THF (anhydrous, inhibitor- free) and cooled to -45 °C and stirred for 15 minutes before adding KHMDS (0.5 M in toluene, 25.5 mL, 12.8 mmol, 1.1 equiv) drop-wise. After the addition of KHMDS was complete, the reaction mixture was stirred at -45 °C for 15 minutes, and chloromethyl butyrate (1.8 mL, 1.2 equiv, 14 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture changed from light yellow to a bluish color. TLC (20% EtOAc/petroleum ether) showed the majority of starting material was converted. LC-MS showed about 7% starting material left. The reaction was quenched by adding 3 mL MeOH, the mixture was warmed to room temperature and concentrated under reduced pressure to an oily residue. The residue was dissolved in petroleum ether and passed through short silica plug to remove the potassium salt. The plug was washed with 13% EtOAc/petroleum ether, and the collected eluates were combined and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude alkylated product was passed through an additional silica plug (product/silica = 1:50) and eluted with 13% EtOAc/petroleum ether to remove residual starting material to give 5.7 g of product 5 (two steps, yield 76%)
Figure imgf000077_0001
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of Tripeptide 6. Alkylated dipeptide 5 (4.3g, 7.0 mmol), /V-methyl pipecolinate (MEP) (4.0g, 28.0 mmol, 4 equiv) and pentafluorophenol (5.7g, 30.8 mmol. 4.4 equiv) were added to a flask. N-methyl pyrrolidone (NMP, 86mL) was added to the mixture. To the mixture was added diisopropylcarbodiimide (DIC, 4.77 mL, 30.8 mmol, 4.4 equiv) was added to the mixture. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for lh. Pd/C (10%, dry, 1.7g) was added. The flask was shaken under hydrogen (30-35 psi) for 5 hours. The reaction mixture was analyzed by HPLC. The starting material was found to be less than 3%. The mixture was filtered through diatomaceous earth. The diatomaceous earth was extracted with 200 mL ethyl acetate. The filtrate and the ethyl acetate extract were combined and transferred to a separatory funnel and washed with 1% NaHCO3/10% NaCl solution (200 mL x 4). The organic layer was isolated and evaporated on a rotary evaporator under reduced pressure. The crude product was dissolved in 40 mL of MeOH/H20 (3: 1). The crude product solution was loaded onto a Biotage CI 8 column (Flash 65i, 350g, 450mL, 65 x 200 mm) and eluted with buffer A [lOmM NH4OAc/ACN (1: 1)] and B (ACN, acetonitrile). The fractions were collected and organic solvent was removed by evaporating on a rotary evaporator. 100 mL of 10% NaCl solution and 100 mL of methyl tert-butyl ether (MTBE) were added to the flask and the mixture was transferred to a separatory funnel. The organic layer was isolated and dried over anhydrous Na2S04, filtered and evaporated on a rotary evaporator to dryness. 2.5g of tripeptide intermediate 6 was obtained (yield 50%).
Figure imgf000078_0001
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of Tripeptide Acid 7. To 2 L of 0.05 M phosphate (pH=7.4) at 30°C was added 3.6 g of porcine liver esterase (17 units/mg). 3.0 g of methyl ester 6 was dissolved in 100 mL of DMSO. The first 50 mL of this solution was added at a rate of
1.1 mL/h, and the second half was added at a rate of 1.2 mL/h via syringe pump. After the addition was complete, the reaction mixture was allowed to stir at 30°C for several hours.
HPLC of an EtOAc extract of the reaction mixture showed the reaction was complete. The reaction mixture was drained from the reactor in 1 L portions and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 1 L). The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over Mg2S04 and concentrated under reduced pressure. 2.8 g of product 7 was recovered (95%). The product appeared to be clean by UPLC analysis, except for pentafluorophenol carried over from the previous reaction.
Intermediate 7 spectral data: LCMS (ESI) [M+H]+ 697.3; 1H NMR (CD30D)
8.02 (s, 1 H), 5.94 (d, J = 12.3 Hz, 1 H), 5.48 (d, J = 12.3 Hz, 1 H), 4.93 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 1 H), 4.65(d, J = 8.5 Hz, 1 H), 3.63 (s, br, 1 H), 2.91 (br, 1 H), 2.67 (s, 3 H), 2.53-2.14 (m, 3 H), 2.14-1.94 (m, 4 H), 1.94-1.74 (m, 4 H), 1.74-1.50 (m, 4 H), 1.28-1.17 (m, 1 H), 1.02-0.83 (m, 24 H), 0.71-0.55 (m, 6 H).
Figure imgf000079_0001
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of Tubulysin B. 1.4 g (2.01 mmol) of tripeptide 7 was dissolved in 8.4 mL THF and 327.4 μL· (2.01 mmol) of 3HF NEt3 was added and the reaction mixture stirred for 30 minutes. LC-MS analysis (10% to 100% acetonitrile, pH 7 buffer) confirmed complete deprotection of the TES group. THF was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was dried under high vacuum for 5 minutes. The crude product was dissolved in 8.4 mL dry pyridine. 2.85 mL (30.15 mmol, 15 equiv) of Ac20 was added at 0°C. The resulting clear solution was stirred at room temperature for 3.5 hours. LC-MS analysis (10% to 100% acetonitrile, pH 7.0) indicated >98% conversion. 56 mL of dioxane/H20 was added and the resulting mixture stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was co-evaporated with toluene (3 x) and dried under high vacuum overnight. Crude product 8 was used directly for the next reaction.
Intermediate 8 spectral data: LCMS (ESI) [M+H]+ 625.2; 1H NMR (CD30D) 8.00 (s, 1 H), 6.00(s, br, 1 H), 5.84 (d, J = 12.1 Hz, 1 H), 5.40 (d, J = 12.1 Hz, 1 H), 4.63(d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1 H), 3.09 (br, 1 H), 2.60-2.20 (m, 7 H), 2.12 (s, 3 H), 2.09-1.86 (m, 3 H), 1.80-1.63 (m, 3 H), 1.59(m, 5 H), 1.19 (m, 1 H), 1.03-0.81 (m, 15 H); 13C NMR (CD30D) 176.2, 174.2, 172.1, 169.1, 155.5, 125.2, 71.4, 69.6, 56.6, 55.5, 44.3, 37.7, 37.1, 36.4, 32.0, 31.2, 25.6, 23.7, 21.0, 20.9, 20.7, 19.3, 16.5, 14.2, 11.0
Method A. The crude tripeptide acid 8 was dissolved in 28 mL EtOAc (anhydrous) and 740 mg (4.02 mmol, 2.0 equiv) of pentafluorophenol was added, followed by 1.04 g (5.03 mmol, 2.5 equiv) of DCC. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. LC-MS (5% to 80% acetonitrile, pH=2.0, formic acid) analysis indicated >95% conversion. The urea by-product was filtered off, the EtOAc was removed under reduced pressure, and the residue was dried under high vacuum for 5 minutes. The residue was dissolved in 8.4 mL DMF, and tubutyrosine hydrochloride salt (Tut-HCl, 678.7 mg, 2.61 mmol, 1.3 equiv) was added, followed by DIPEA (2.28 mL, 13.07 mmol, 6.5 equiv). The resulting clear solution was stirred at room temperature for 10 minutes. The reaction mixture was diluted with DMSO and purified on prep-HPLC (X-bridge column, 10 mM NH4OAc, pH=6.3, 25% to 100% acetonitrile). Pure fractions were combined, acetonitrile was removed under reduced pressure, extracted with EtOAc (3 x), and dried over Na2S04. The EtOAc was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was dried under high vacuum for 1 hour to yield 513 mg of the desired product (31% combined yield from 6).
Method B. Tripeptide 8 (229 mg, 0.367 mmol) was dissolved in EtOAc (anhydrous), 134.9 mg (0.733 mmol, 2.0 equiv) of pentafluorophenol was added, followed by 970 mg (1.84 mmol, 5.0 equiv) of DCC on the resin. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. LC-MS analysis indicated >96% conversion. The reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated to dryness, dried under high vacuum for 5 minutes. The residue was dissolved in 3.5 mL DMF, Tut-HCl (123.9 mg, 0.477 mmol, 1.3 equiv) was added, followed by DIPEA (0.42 mL, 2.386 mmole, 6.5 equiv). The resulting clear solution was stirred at room temperature for 10 minutes. The reaction mixture was diluted with DMSO, purified on prep-HPLC (X-bridge column, 10 mM NH4OAc, 25% to 100%, two runs). The pure fractions were combined, the acetonitrile was removed under reduced pressure, the residue was extracted with EtOAc (2 x) and the combined EtOAc extracts dried over Na2S04. The EtOAc was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was dried under high vacuum for 1 hour to yield 175 mg of desired product (58% combined yield from 6).
Figure imgf000080_0001
EXAMPLE. Large Scale Synthesis of Dipeptide 5. 10.2 g of dipeptide 3 (25.6 mmol) was dissolved in 130 mL dichloromethane, imidazole (1.9g, 28.1 mmol) was added to the resulting solution at 0°C. The reaction mixture was warmed slightly to dissolve all solids and re-cooled to 0°C. TESC1 (4.5 mL, 26.8 mmol) was added drop-wise at 0°C, the reaction mixture was stirred under argon and warmed to room temperature over 2 h. TLC (3: 1 hexanes/EtOAc) showed complete conversion. The reaction was filtered to remove the imidazole HC1 salt, extracted with de-ionized water, and the aqueous phase was back-washed with dichloromethane, the combined organic phase was washed with brine, dried over Na2S04, filtered to remove the Na2S04, concentrated under reduced pressure, co-evaporated with toluene and dried under high-vacuum overnight to give 12.2 g of product 4.
The crude product 4 was co-evaporated with toluene again and used without further purification. TES protected dipeptide was dissolved in 80 mL THF (anhydrous, inhibitor- free) and cooled to -45 °C and stirred for 15 minutes before adding KHMDS (0.5 M in toluene, 50 mL, 25.0 mmol, 1.05 equiv) drop-wise. After the addition of KHMDS was complete, the reaction mixture was stirred at -45 °C for 15 minutes, and chloromethyl butyrate (3.6 mL, 1.2 equiv, 28.3 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture changed from light yellow to a bluish color. TLC (20% EtOAc/petroleum ether) showed the reaction was complete. The reaction was quenched by adding 20 mL MeOH, the mixture was warmed to room temperature and concentrated under reduced pressure to an oily residue. The residue was dissolved in petroleum ether and passed through short silica plug to remove the potassium salt. The plug was washed with 13% EtO Ac/petroleum ether, and the collected eluents were combined and concentrated under reduced pressure to give 12.1 g of product 5 (two steps, yield 76%)
Figure imgf000081_0001
EXAMPLE. Large Scale Synthesis of Tripeptide 6. Alkylated dipeptide 5 (7.6g, 12.4 mmol), N-methyl pipecolinate (MEP) (7.0g, 48.9 mmol, 4 equiv) and
pentafluorophenol (10.0 g, 54.3 mmol. 4.4 equiv) were added to a flask. N-methyl pyrrolidone (NMP, 152 mL) was added to the mixture. To the mixture was added diisopropylcarbodiimide (DIC, 8.43 mL, 54.4 mmol, 4.4 equiv) was added to the mixture. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for lh. Pd/C (10%, dry, 3.0 g) was added. The flask was shaken under hydrogen (30-35 psi) for 5 hours. The reaction mixture was analyzed by HPLC. The reaction was complete. The mixture was filtered through celite. The celite was washed with 500 mL ethyl acetate. The solutions were combined and transferred to a separatory funnel and washed with 1% NaHCO3/10% NaCl solution (250 mL x 4). The organic layer was isolated and evaporated on a rotary evaporator under reduced pressure. The crude product was dissolved in dichloromethane and the urea was filtered. The crude product solution was loaded onto a Teledyne Redisep Silica Column (330g) and purified with EtO Ac/petroleum ether on
CombiFlash flash chromatography system. The fractions were collected and organic solvent was removed by evaporating to give 5.0 g of the tripeptide (61 ). NMR and mass spectral data were consistent with those measured for the Example
Figure imgf000082_0001
EXAMPLE. Large Scale Synthesis of Tripeptide Acid 7. To 2 L of 0.05 M phosphate (pH=7.4) at 30°C was added 3.6 g of porcine liver esterase (17 units/mg). 3.0 g of methyl ester 6 was dissolved in 100 mL of DMSO. The first 50 mL of this solution was added at a rate of 1.1 mL/h, and the second half was added at a rate of 1.2 mL/h via syringe pump. After the addition was complete, the reaction mixture was allowed to stir at 30°C for several hours. HPLC of an EtOAc extract of the reaction mixture showed the reaction was complete. The reaction mixture was drained from the reactor in 1 L portions and extracted with 94% EtOAc-6% MeOH (vol./vol.) solution (3 x 1 L). The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over Na2S04 and concentrated under reduced pressure. 2.8 g of product 6 was recovered (95%). The product appeared to be clean by UPLC analysis, except for
pentafluorophenol carried over from the previous reaction.
Figure imgf000082_0002
EXAMPLE. Large Scale Synthesis of Tubulysin B. 3.0 g (4.30 mmol) of tripeptide 7 was dissolved in 18 mL THF and 0.70 mL (4.30 mmol) of 3HF NEt3 was added and the reaction mixture stirred for 30 minutes. LC-MS analysis (10% to 100% acetonitrile, pH 7 buffer) confirmed complete deprotection of the TES group. THF was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was dried under high vacuum for 5 minutes. The crude product was dissolved in 18 mL dry pyridine. 6.11 mL (64.50 mmol, 15 equiv) of Ac20 was added at 0°C. The resulting clear solution was stirred at room temperature for 5 hours. LC-MS analysis (10% to 100% acetonitrile, pH 7.0) indicated >98% conversion. 117 mL of dioxane/H20 was added and the resulting mixture stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was co-evaporated with toluene (3 x) and dried under high vacuum overnight. Crude product 8 was used directly for the next reaction. LCMS (ESI) [M+H]+ 625.2; the NMR spectral data was consistent with structure 8.
Method B. The crude tripeptide acid 8 (2.67 g, 4.30 mmol) was dissolved mL of DCM (anhydrous), 1.59 g (8.6 mmol, 2.0 equiv) of pentafluorophenol was added, followed by 9.33 g (21.5 mmol, 5.0 equiv) of DCC on the resin. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. LC-MS analysis indicated >96% conversion. The reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated to dryness, dried under high vacuum for 5 minutes. The residue was dissolved in 16.5 mL DMF, Tut-HCl (1.45 g, 5.59 mmol, 1.3 equiv) was added, followed by DIPEA (4.88 mL, 27.95 mmol, 6.5 equiv). The resulting clear solution was stirred at room temperature for 10 minutes. The reaction mixture was purified on prep- HPLC (X-bridge column, 50 mM NH4HCO3, 25% to 100%, six runs). The pure fractions were combined, the acetonitrile was removed under reduced pressure, the residue was extracted with EtOAc (2 x) and the combined EtOAc extracts dried over Na2S04. The EtOAc was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was dried under high vacuum for 1 hour to yield 1.35 g of desired product (38% combined yield from 6). NMR spectral data was consistent with the tubulysin B.
Figure imgf000083_0001
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of 3-nitro-2-disulfenylethanol 12. A three-necked 500 mL flask was dried and argon purged, then fitted with an addition funnel. 3-Nitro-2-sulfenyl chloride pyridine 12a (5.44g, 27.11 mmol, 1.4 equiv) was added to the flask and dissolved in 200 mL of CH2C12. The solution was cooled to 0°C. Mercaptoethanol (1.33 mL, 18.98mmol) was diluted with 50 mL of CH2C12 and placed in the addition funnel. The 2-mercaptoethanol solution was then added drop-wise slowly over the course of 15 minutes. The reaction progress was monitored by TLC (Rf 0.4 in 5% CH30H/CH2C12). Solvent was removed under reduced pressure and dried. The crude product was purified over silica gel (5%
CH30H/CH2C12). The fractions were collected and solvent was removed by evaporating on a rotary evaporator and dried. 3.4 g of 3-nitro-2-disulfenylethanol 12 was obtained (77% yield).
Figure imgf000084_0001
12 11
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of 4-nitrophenyl-(3'-nitropyridin-2'-yl)disulfenylethyl carbonate 11. A 250 mL Round-Bottomed Flask was dried and argon purged. 3-Nitro-2- disulfenylethanol 12 (3.413g, 14.69 mmol) was added and dissolved in 45 mL of CH2C12. 4- Nitrophenylchloroformate (3.663g, 17.63 mmol, 1.2 equiv) was added, along with
triethylamine (2.9 mL, 20.57 mmol, 1.4 equiv), and the mixture stirred under argon overnight. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and dried. The residue was purified by silica (30% EtO Ac/petroleum ether) and the fractions were collected, solvent was removed under reduced pressure, and dried. 2.7 g of 4-nitrophenyl-(3'-nitropyridin-2'- yl)disulfenyleth l carbonate 11 was obtained (47% yield).
Figure imgf000084_0002
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of 2-(Boc-tubutyrosine (Tut))hydrazinecarboxylic acid (3'nitropyridyl-2'-yl)disulfanylethyl ester 14. 10.67 g (33 mmol) of Boc -Tut- acid 10 was dissolved in 100 mL anhydrous THF, 17.24 g (33 mmol) of PyBop, and 17.50 mL (99 mmol, 3.0 equiv) of DIPEA were added. The reaction mixture stirred for few minutes, 1.0 mL (31.68 mmol, 0.96 equiv) of hydrazine was added and stirred for 15 minutes. LC-MS analysis (X- Bridge shield RP18, 3.5 μιη column; gradient 10% to 100% acetonitrile in 6 min, pH 7.4 buffer) confirmed the hydrazide 13 formation. 14.47 g (36.3 mmol, 1.1 equiv) of 4- nitrophenyl-(3'-nitropyridin-2'-yl)disulfenylethyl carbonate 11 was added. The resulting clear solution was stirred at room temperature for 24 hours. LC-MS analysis (X-Bridge shield
RP18, 3.5 μιη column; gradient 30% to 100% acetonitrile in 9 min, pH 7.4 buffer) indicated >98% conversion. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtO Ac (~ 1.0 L), washed with sat. NH4C1 (400 mL), sat. NaHC03 solution (3 x 300 mL), and brine (300 mL). The organic layer was dried over Na2S04 (100 g), and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was loaded onto a Teledyne Redisep Gold Silica Column and eluted with MeOH/ CH2C12 (330 g column; 0 to 10% gradient) using a CombiFlash chromatography system. The fractions were collected and solvent was removed under reduced pressure and dried. 16.10 g of 2-(Boc- Tut)hydrazinecarboxylic acid (3'nitropyridyl-2'-yl)disulfanylethyl ester 14 was obtained (82% yield).
Figure imgf000085_0001
3 4 5
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of azido methylbutyrate dipeptide 5. 10.83 g of dipeptide 3 (27.25 mmol) was dissolved in 100 mL dichloromethane and imidazole (2.05 g, 1.1 eq.) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature to dissolve all solids and cooled in the ice bath for 10 min. TESC1 (4.8 mL, 1.05 eqiv.) was added drop-wise at 0°C, stirred under argon, and warmed to room temperature over 1.5 h. TLC (3: 1 hexanes/EtOAc) showed complete conversion. The reaction was filtered to remove the imidazole HC1 salt. 125 mL dichloromethane was added to the filtrate, and the resulting solution was extracted with 250 mL brine. The brine layer was extracted with 125 mL dichloromethane. The combined organic phase was washed with 250 mL brine, separated, dried over 45.2 g of Na2S04, and filtered. The resulting solution was concentrated under reduced pressure, co-evaporated with toluene (2 x 5 mL) and dried over high-vacuum overnight to give 14.96 g of crude product 4.
The crude product 4 was used without further purification. TES protected dipeptide was dissolved in 100 mL THF (anhydrous, inhibitor-free), cooled to -45°C, and stirred at -45°C for 15 minutes before adding KHMDS (0.5 M in toluene, 61 mL, 1.05 equiv.), drop-wise. After the addition of KHMDS was finished, the reaction was stirred at -45°C for 20 minutes, and chloromethyl butyrate (4.4 mL, 1.1 equiv.) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at -45 °C for another 20 minutes. The reaction was quenched with 25 mL MeOH and warmed to room temperature. 250 mL EtOAc and 250 mL brine were added to the reaction mixture, and the organic phase was separated. The solvent was evaporated to reduce the volume of solution. The solution was passed through 76.5 g silica in a 350 mL sintered glass funnel. The silica plug was washed with 500 mL EtOAc/petroleum ether (1:4). The filtrate and the wash were concentrated to oily residue and dried under high vacuum to give 16.5 g product 5 as a light yellow wax.
Figure imgf000086_0001
5 6
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of tripeptide methyl ester 6. Based on 16.5 g of alkylated dipeptide 5 (26.97 mmol.), N-methyl pipecolinate (MEP) (5.51 g, 1.4 equiv.) and pentafluorophenol (7.63 g, 1.5 equiv.) were added to a 300 mL hydrogenation flask. NMP (115 mL) was then added, followed by EDC (7.78 g, 1.5 equiv.). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for overnight. 16.5 g of alkylated dipeptide 5 was dissolved in 16.5 mL NMP, transferred the solution into the hydrogenation flask, washed the residual 5 with 8 mL NMP, and transferred into the hydrogenation flask. Dry 10% Pd/C (1.45, 0.05 eq.) was added. The reaction mixture was vacuumed/back filled with hydrogen 3 times, and the flask was shaken under hydrogen (-35 psi) for 3.5 hours. The reaction mixture was analyzed by HPLC. The reaction mixture was filtered through 40 g of celite in a 350 mL sintered glass funnel and washed with 250 mL of EtOAc. The filtrate and the wash were transferred to a separatory funnel and washed with a 1% NaHCO3/10% NaCl solution (200 mL x 3). The organic layer was isolated and dried over 45.2 g of Na2S04. The solution was filtered and rotovaped under reduced pressure. A sticky amber residue was obtained and dried under high vacuum overnight to give 19.3 g of crude product. The crude product was dissolved in 10 mL of dichloromethane, split into two portions, and purified with a 330 g Teledyne Redisep Silica Gold column. The combined fractions of two purifications were evaporated and dried under high vacuum to give 7.64 g of 6 as a pale yellow solid (overall yield: 39% over 3 steps from compound 3).
Figure imgf000086_0002
6 7
EXAMPLE. Alternative Synthesis of tripeptide acid 7. Methyl ester 6 (6.9 g,
9.7 mmol) was dissolved in 1,2-dichloroethane (193 mL) and added to a round bottomed flask, equipped with a stir bar and condenser. To this solution was added trimethyltin hydroxide (24.6 g, 14 eq.). The mixture was heated at 70°C for 5 hours. LC-MS analysis indicated that the desired product had been formed and < 15 % of starting methyl ester 6 remained. The reaction was cooled in an ice bath for 30 minutes. The resulting precipitate was then removed by filtration. The filtrate was stored overnight at - 20°C. The filtrate was then divided into two portions and each was subjected the chromatography procedure which follows.
Each portion was concentrated under reduced pressure and then placed under high vacuum for 30 min. The concentrate was then immediately dissolved in acetonitrile (95 mL). To this solution was then added an ammonium bicarbonate solution (95 mL; 50 mM, pH = 7). This solution was loaded onto a Biotage SNAP CI 8 reverse phase cartridge (400g, KP- C18-HS) and eluted with 50 mM ammonium bicarbonate and acetonitrile (1: 1 to 100% ACN) using a Biotage chromatography system. Fractions were analyzed by LC-MS. Pure fractions were combined and ACN was removed under reduced pressure. The resulting aqueous suspension was extracted with EtOAc (3 X). The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over anhydrous Na2S04, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification of the two ortions resulted in the recovery of 7 (4.6 g, 65%).
Figure imgf000087_0001
i. Ac20, Py
ii. dioxane-water
Figure imgf000087_0002
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of acetyl tripeptide acid 8. In a round bottomed flask, tripeptide acid 7 (3.9 g, 5.6 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (23 mL). To this solution was added 3 HF'TEA complex (1.8 mL, 2 eq.). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. LC-MS analysis indicated complete conversion to the desired des-TES product 7a. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was placed on the high vacuum for 40 minutes. The resulting residue was then dissolved in pyridine (26 mL), and acetic anhydride (7.9 mL, 15 eq.) and DMAP (25 mg) were added. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. LC-MS analysis indicated complete conversion to the desired acetyl tripeptide acid 8. To the reaction mixture was then added a 1: 1 solution of 1,4- dioxane/water (150 mL). The reaction was stirred for 1 hour at which point the solvents were removed under high vacuum rotovap. To the residue was added toluene and the solvent was removed under vacuum (80 mL, 3X). The resulting crude 8 was dried under high vacuum overnight. The crude material was then dissolved in ACN (72 mL). Sodium phosphate buffer (50 mM, pH = 7.8, 288 mL) was then added, and the pH of the resulting suspension was adjusted to neutral using saturated sodium bicarbonate solution. This solution was loaded onto a Biotage SNAP CI 8 reverse phase cartridge (400 g, KP-C18-HS) and eluted with water and acetonitrile (20% ACN to 65% ACN) using a Biotage chromatography system. Fractions were analyzed by LC-MS. Clean fractions were combined, the ACN was removed, and the aqueous solution was laced on the freeze dryer, resulting in purified acetyl tripeptide 8 (2.5 g, 71%).
Figure imgf000088_0001
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of 2-(tubulysin B)hydrazinecarboxylic acid (3'nitropyridyl-2'-yl)disulfanylethyl ester 2. The activated Boc-Tut-fragment 14 (2.63 g, 4.42 mmol, 1.1 equiv) was treated with TFA/CH2CI2 (42 mL; 1: 1) and stirred for 30 minutes. LC- MS analysis (X-Bridge shield RP18, 3.5 μιη column; gradient 10% to 100% acetonitrile in 6 min, pH 7.4 buffer) confirmed the product formation. TFA was removed under reduced pressure, co-evaporated with CH2CI2 (3 x 30 mL) and activated Tut-derivative 9 was dried under high vacuum for 18h. In another flask, the tripeptide acid 8 (2.51 g, 4.02 mmol) was dissolved in 70 mL CH2CI2 (anhydrous) and 1.48 g (8.04 mmol, 2.0 equiv) of
pentafluorophenol in 5 mL of CH2CI2 was added, followed by 8.74 g (20.1 mmol, 5.0 equiv) of DCC -resin. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 hours. LC- MS analysis (X-Bridge shield RP18, 3.5 μιη column; gradient 10% to 100% acetonitrile in 6 min, pH 7.4 buffer) indicated >99% conversion. The DCC-resin was filtered off, the CH2CI2 was removed under reduced pressure, and the pentafluorophenol activated product 15 was dried under high vacuum for 10 minutes. The residue was dissolved in 16.7 mL DMF, and DIPEA (12.6 mL, 72.36 mmol, 18.0 equiv) was added. Tut-fragment trifluoroacetic acid salt 9 in DMF (8.5 mL) was added slowly over 5 min. The resulting clear solution was stirred at room temperature for lh. LC-MS analysis (X-Bridge shield RP18, 3.5 μιη column; gradient 10% to 100% acetonitrile in 6 min, pH 7.4 buffer) confirmed the product formation. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc (700 mL), washed with brine (300 mL, 2 xlOO mL), dried over Na2S04 (75 g), concentrated, and dried for 15 hours. The crude product was dissolved in CH2C12 (25 mL) and loaded onto a Teledyne Redisep Gold Silica Column and eluted with MeOH/ CH2C12 (330 g column; 0 to 5% gradient) using Combiflash
chromatographic system. The fractions were collected and solvent was removed by evaporating on a rotary evaporator and dried. 3.91g of 2-(tubulysin B)hydrazinecarboxylic acid (3'nitropyridyl-2'-yl)disulfanylethyl ester 2 was obtained (89% yield).
EXAMPLE. General Synthesis of Disulfide Containing Tubulysin Conjugates. A binding ligand- linker intermediate containing a thiol group is taken in deionized water (ca. 20 mg/mL, bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) and the pH of the suspension was adjusted with aqueous phosphate (bubbled with argon for 10 minutes prior to use) to a pH of about 7.0 (the suspension may become a solution when the pH increased). Additional deionized water is added (ca. 20-25%) to the solution as needed, and to the aqueous solution is added immediately a solution of compound (2) in acetonitrile (ca. 20 mg/mL). The reaction mixture becomes homogenous quickly. After stirring under argon, e.g. for 45 minutes, the reaction mixture is diluted with 2.0 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.0, ca 150 volume percent) and the acetonitrile is removed under vacuum. The resulting suspension is filtered and the filtrate may be purified by preparative HPLC. Fractions are lyophilized to isolate the conjugates. The foregoing method is equally applicable for preparing other tubulysin conjugates by the appropriate selection of the tubulysin starting compound, including tubulysin starting compounds having a 3-nitropyridin-2-ylthio activating group.
Illustrative binding ligand-linker intermediates are described in WO 2008/112873, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
Figure imgf000090_0001
EC0488. This binding ligand-linker intermediate was prepared by SPPS according to the general peptide synthesis procedure described herein starting from H-Cys(4- methoxytrityl)-2-chlorotrityl-Resin, and the following SPPS reagents:
Figure imgf000090_0002
Coupling steps. In a peptide synthesis vessel add the resin, add the amino acid solution, DIPEA, and PyBOP. Bubble argon for lhr. and wash 3X with DMF and IPA. Use 20% piperidine in DMF for Fmoc deprotection, 3X (lOmin), before each amino acid coupling. Continue to complete all 9 coupling steps. At the end treat the resin with 2% hydrazine in DMF 3X (5min) to cleave TFA protecting group on Pteroic acid, wash the resin with DMF (3X), IPA (3X), MeOH (3X), and bubble the resin with argon for 30 min.
Cleavage step. Reagent: 92.5% TFA, 2.5% H20, 2.5% triisopropylsilane, 2.5% ethanedithiol. Treat the resin with cleavage reagent 3X (10 min, 5 min, 5 min) with argon bubbling, drain, wash the resin once with cleavage reagent, and combine the solution. Rotavap until 5ml remains and precipitate in diethyl ether (35 mL). Centrifuge, wash with diethyl ether, and dry. About half of the crude solid (-100 mg) was purified by HPLC.
HPLC Purification step. Column: Waters Xterra Prep MS C18 10 μιη 19x250 mm; Solvent A: lOmM ammonium acetate, pH 5; Solvent B: ACN; Method: 5 min 0% B to 25 min 20% B 26mL/min. Fractions containing the product was collected and freeze-dried to give 43 mg EC0488 (51% yield). 1H NMR and LC/MS (exact mass 1678.62) were consistent with the product.
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC0531.
Figure imgf000091_0001
EC0531 is prepared according to the processes described herein from compound (2) and EC0488 in 73% yield.
Figure imgf000091_0002
The ether analog of compound 103 can also be prepared. Reductive condensation of that ether analog with MEP yields 105 directly.
Figure imgf000091_0003
102 EXAMPLE. Compound 102. 4.9 g of dipeptide 101 (11.6 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (60 mL) and imidazole (0.87g, 12.7 mmol) was added to the resulting solution at 0°C. The reaction mixture was warmed slightly to dissolve all the solids and cooled back to 0°C. Triethylsilyl chloride (TESCl) (2.02 mL, 12.1 mmol) was added drop- wise at 0°C, stirred under argon, and warmed to room temperature over 2 h. TLC (3: 1 hexanes/EtOAc) showed complete conversion. The reaction was filtered to remove the imidazole HC1 salt, extracted with de-ionized water, and the aqueous phase was back-washed with dichloromethane. The combined organic phase was washed with brine, dried over Na2S04, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue was co- evaporated with toluene and dried over high-vacuum overnight to give 6.4 g of crude product 102 (5.9 g theoretical yield).
Figure imgf000092_0001
EXAMPLE. Compound 103. The crude product 102 was co-evaporated with toluene again and then dissolved in THF (38 mL, anhydrous, inhibitor-free), cooled to -45°C, and stirred for 15 minutes before adding potassium hexamethyldisilazide (KHMDS) (0.5 M in toluene, 25.5 mL, 12.8 mmol, 1.1 equiv), drop-wise. After the addition of KHMDS was finished, the reaction was stirred at -45°C for 15 minutes, and chloromethyl butyrate (1.8 mL, 1.2 equiv, 14 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture changed from light yellow to a blueish color. TLC (20% EtOAc/petroleum ether) showed the majority of starting material converted. LC-MS showed about 7% starting material left. The reaction was quenched by adding MeOH (3 mL), warmed to room temperature, and concentrated to an oily residue. The residue was dissolved in petroleum ether and passed through short silica plug. The plug was washed with 13% EtO Ac/petroleum ether, and the eluents was concentrated. The alkyated product was passed through silica plug (product/silica = 1:50) and washed by 13% EtO Ac/petroleum ether to remove residual starting material to give 5.7 g of product 103 (two steps with yield 76%).
Figure imgf000092_0002
104
EXAMPLE. Compound 104. Alkylated dipeptide 103 (4.3g, 7.0 mmol), N- methyl pipecolinate (MEP) (4.0g, 28.0mmol, 4 equiv), and pentafluorophenol (PFP) (5.7g, 30.8mmol. 4.4 equiv) were added to a flask. N-Methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) (86 mL) was then added, followed by iV,jVLdiisopropylcarbodiimide (DIC) (4.77 mL, 30.8mmol, 4.4 equiv). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for lh. Pd/C (10%, dry, 1.7g) was added. The flask was shaken under hydrogen (30-35 psi) for 5 hours. The reaction mixture was analyzed by HPLC. The starting material was found to be less than 3%. The mixture was filtered through celite. The celite was washed with ethyl acetate (200 mL). The combined filtrate was transferred to separatory funnel and washed with 1% NaHCO3/10% NaCl solution (200 mL x 4). The organic layer was isolated and rotavaped under reduced pressure. The crude product was dissolved in 40 mL of MeOH/H20 (3: 1). The crude product solution was loaded onto a Biotage C18 column (Flash 65i, 350g, 450mL, 65 x 200 mm) and eluted with buffer A [lOmM NFLOAc/ACN (1: 1)] and B (ACN). The fractions were collected and organic solvent was removed under reduced pressure. A 10% NaCl solution (100 mL) and methyl t-buyl ether (MTBE) (100 mL)were added to the flask and the mixture was transferred to a separatory funnel. The organic layer was isolated and dried over anhydrous Na2S04, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. 2.5g of tripeptide intermediate 104 was obtained (yield 50%).
Figure imgf000093_0001
EXAMPLE. Compound 105a. Compound 104 (50 mg, 0.07 mmol) in allyl alcohol (5 mL) was treated with di-n-butyltin oxide (1.75 mg, 0.007 mmol, 10% mol). The reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 22 hrs till the reaction was complete. The reaction was concentrated and purified with HPLC in 10-100% ACN/NH3HCO3 buffer (pH7.0) to give the title compound (32.4 mg, yield 65%). LCMS: [M+H]+ m/z= 707.73. 1H NMR (CD3OD, δ in ppm): 8.35 (s, 1 H), 6.01(m, 2H); 5.2-5.5 (m, 3H), 5.14 (d, J = 10.26Hz, 1H), 5.04 (d, J = 5.87Hz, 1H), 4.88 (s, 3H), 4.82(d, J = 5.5Hz, 2H), 4.70 (d, J = 8.79Hz, 1H), 4.50(d, J = 10.26Hz, 1H), 4.42(b, 1H), 4.06(s, 2H), 2.92 (d, J = 11.36Hz, 1H), 2.55 (d, J = 9.17Hz,lH), 1.95-2.20 (m, 7H), 1.45-1.82 (m, 7H), 1.22 (m, 2H), 0.82-1.00 (m, 17H), 0.77 (d, J = 6.23Hz, 3H), 0.59-0.70 (m, 6H); 13C NMR (CD3OD, δ in ppm): 176.97, 175.08, 174.09, 160.95, 146.02, 134.13, 132.05, 127.94, 117.38, 116.37, 73.85, 70.32, 69.14, 68.40, 65.34, 56.89, 55.20, 53.55, 43.35, 40.37, 36.38, 31.59, 30.15, 24.80, 24.27, 22.93, 19.09, 18.71, 15.31, 9.52, 5.77, 4.41.
Figure imgf000094_0001
106a
EXAMPLE. Compound 106a. Compound 105a (15.3 mg, 0.02 mmol) was subjected to hydrolysis with LiOH H20 (0.99 mg, 0.024 mmol) in 4: 1 THF/H20 (2.5 mL) for 19 hrs at room temperature (rt). The reaction was purified with HPLC in 10-100%
ACN/NH3HCO3 buffer (pH7.0) to provide compound 106a (9.2mg, yield 83%). LCMS:
[M+H]+ m/z = 553.55. 1H NMR (CD3OD, δ in ppm): 7.94 (s, 1H), 6.00 (m, 1H), 5.1-5.4 (m, 3H), 4.68 (d, J = 9.09 Hz, 2H), 4.10 (d, J = 3.81 Hz, 2H), 2.80 (b, 1H), 2.56 (s, 2H), 1.4-2.2 (m, 11H), 1.20 (m, 1H), 0.80-0.99 (m, 13H); 13C NMR (CD3OD, δ in ppm): 17.90, 167.53, 153.18, 134.05, 123.09, 116.53, 68.63, 67.25, 54.85, 54.44, 42.10, 37.75, 36.53, 30.60, 29.13, 24.26, 23.25, 21.37, 20.32, 19.53, 14.7
Figure imgf000094_0002
107a
EXAMPLE. Compound 107a. To compound 106a (9.2 mg, 0.017 mmol) in pyridine (1 mL) was added acetic anhydride (15.7 μί, 0.165 mmol) and a catalytic amount of 4-dimethylamino pyridine (0.053 M in pyridine, 5 μί) at rt under argon. The reaction was stirred for 24 hrs. To the reaction mixture was added 0.4 mL of dioxane/water (1: 1) and stirred for 10 min, and then the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was purified with HPLC in 10-100% ACN/NH3HCO3 buffer (pH7.0) to provide the product 7a 10.4 mg (quantitative yield).
LCMS: [M+H]+ m/z = 595.59. 1H NMR (CD3OD, δ in ppm): 7.96 (s, 1H), 5.8- 6.0 (m, 2H), 5.33 (d, J = 17.59 Hz, 1H), 5.19 (d, J = 10.56 Hz, 1H), 4.71 (d, J = 9.23 Hz, 2H), 4.05 (d, J = 5.71 Hz, 2H), 3.30 (m, 6H), 2.50 (b, 4H), 2.10 (s, 3H), 1.40-2.00 (m, 7 H), 1.20 (m, 1H), 0.80-1.02 (m, 11H); 13C NMR (CD3OD, δ in ppm): 175.11, 170.44, 167.29, 153.45, 133.92, 123.40, 116.79, 116.55, 68.62, 67.82, 67.11, 54.75, 54.16, 42.39, 36.31, 36.12, 34.91, 30.55, 29.26, 24.09, 23.26, 21.25, 20.24, 19.48, 19.20, 14.78, 9.56.
Figure imgf000095_0001
108a
EXAMPLE. Compound 107a (10.4 mg, 0.017 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous methylene chloride (4 mL) and to this solution was added DCC-resin (2.3 mmol/g, 0.038 g, 0.087 mmol) and followed by pentafluorophenol (PFP, 6.26 mg, 0.034 mmol) at rt under argon. The reaction was stirred for 19 hrs at rt. The reaction mixture was filtered and the solution was concentrated. The residue was redissolved in dry DMF (4 mL). Then, (2S,4R)-4- amino-5-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-methylpentanoic acid (Tut acid) was added into the solution, followed by DIPEA (8.9 μί, 0.051 mmol). When completed, the reaction was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified with HPLC. Product 108a was obtained (13.1 mg, 96% yield). LCMS: [M+H]+ m/z = 800.88. 1H NMR (CD3OD, δ in ppm): 8.08 (s, 1H), 7.02 (d, J = 8.43Hz, 2H), 6.68 (d, J = 8.06Hz, 2H), 5.99 (d, J = 10.99Hz, 1H), 5.80 (m, 1H), 5.38 (d, J = 9.53Hz, 1H), 5.31 (d, J = 17.23Hz, 1H), 5.13 (d, J = 10.63Hz, 1H), 4.66 (d, J = 8.79Hz, 1H), 4.55 (d, J = 10.28Hz, 1H), 4.30 (b, 2H), 4.00 (b, 2H), 3.16 (b, 2H), 2.80 (d, J = 5.86Hz, 2H), 2.40 (b, 4H), 2.10-2.30 (b, 2H), 1.40-1.90 (b, 6H), 1.23 (s, 3H), 1.17 (d, J = 6.96Hz, 3H), 1.05 (d, J = 6.23Hz, 2H), 0.94 (d, J = 6.97Hz, 2H), 0.90 (d, J = 7.70Hz, 2H), 0.79 (d, J = 6.6Hz, 3H); 13C NMR (CD3OD, δ in ppm): 179.24, 174.88, 170.97, 170.43, 170.20, 161.29, 155.62, 149.30, 133.70, 130.23, 128.44, 123.54, 116.41, 114.72, 69.92, 68.15, 67.87, 54.96, 53.92, 49.27, 42.40, 39.62, 37.72, 36.91, 36.08, 35.29, 31.01, 29.51, 29.33, 24.08, 23.72, 21.93, 19.40, 19.34, 18.89, 17.24 15.00, 9.34.
Figure imgf000095_0002
114a
EXAMPLE. Compound 114a. Compound 107a (26.4 mg, 0.044 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous methylene chloride (5 mL) and to this solution was added DCC-resin (2.3 mmol/g, 0.096 g, 0.22 mmol), followed by pentafluorophenol (PFP, 16.4 mg, 0.089 mmo at rt under argon. The reaction was stirred for 19 hrs at rt. The reaction was filtered and concentrated and the residue was redissolved in dry DMF (5 mL). 2-((3-nitropyridin-2- yl)disulfanyl)ethyl 2-((2S,4R)-4-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-5-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-2- methylpentanoyl)hydrazinecarboxylate (40.0 mg, 0.067 mmol) was deprotected with
TFA/DCM (1: 1, 5 mL, 1 drop of TIPS as scavenger) at rt for 1 hr. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure, 5 mL more of DCM was added, and then the solvent was co- evaporated to dryness. The residue was dissolved in dry DMF (2 mL) and was added to the solution of PFP ester intermediate in DMF made above after the addition of DIPEA (23.2 μί, 0.13 mmol) at rt under argon. The reaction was stirred for 19 hrs and diluted with EtOAc (20 mL). The organic phase was washed with water (5 mL x 3) and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2S04 and concentrated after filtration to give the crude product 114a (52.8 mg), which could be used for conjugation with folate. LCMS: [M+H]+ m/z =1072.92.
Figure imgf000096_0001
EXAMPLE. Compound 105b. Compound 4 (75.9 mg, 0.11 mmol) in n- butanol (4 mL) was treated with n-Bu2SnO (2.12 mg, 0.0085 mmol, 8.0 mol %) at rt and the reaction was heated to 100°C for 2 days. The solvent was reduced to a minimum and the product was purified with CombiFlash (Teledyne Redisep Silica column, eluted with 0 to 15% of MeOH/DCM) to give 44.0 mg (56%) of intermediate 105b. LCMS: [M+H]+ m/z = 739.61. 1H NMR (CDC13, δ in ppm): 8.07 (s, 1H), 7.02 (d, J = 9.68Hz, 1H), 5.27 (d, J = 9.67Hz, 1H), 5.02 (dd, J = 8.36, 2.64Hz, 1H), 4.69 (t, J = 9.23Hz, 4.20-4.40(m, 4H), 3.47 (td, J = 6.6, 1.76Hz, 2H), 2.88 (d, J = 11.44Hz, 1H), 2.46 (dd, J = 10.55, 3.08Hz, 2H), 1.90-2.24 (m, 8H), 1.10-1.79 (m, 18H), 0.80-1.00 (m, 19H), 0.58-0.78 (m, 6H).
Figure imgf000096_0002
106b
EXAMPLE. Compound 106b. The same procedure as for compound 106a was followed. 106b (11.7 mg, 35%) was obtained from intermediate 105b (44.0 mg). LCMS:
[M+H]+ m/z = 569.51. 1H NMR (CDC13 drops of CD3OD, δ in ppm) 8.00 (s, 1H), 5.23 (b, 1H), 4.80 (b, 1H), 4.58 (d, J = 8.80Hz, 1H), 4.42 (b, 1H), 3.45 (t, J = 6.38Hz, 1H), 3.33 (b, 3H), 2.15-2.40 (m, 3H), 1.80-2.10 (m, 2H), 1.40-1.79 (m, 4H), 1.04-1.38 (m, 3H), 0.60-1.02 (m, 9H).
Figure imgf000097_0001
107b
EXAMPLE. Compound 107b. In a lOmL round bottom flask, 106b (11.7mg, 0.021 mmol) and acetic anhydride (20μΕ, 0.212 mmol) were dissolved in pyridine (lmL). To this solution was added a catalytic amount of dimethylaminopyridine (lmg, 0.008 mmol). This solution was stirred at room temperature for 16 h under Argon. LCMS (10-100% ACN, 50mM NH4HCO3 pH7) indicated all of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed. To the flask was added a 1: 1 mixture of 1,4-dioxane and water (0.4mL) and the solution was stirred for 10 min to hydrolyze any potential diacetate side product. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure, then purified by preparative HPLC (10- 100% ACN, 50mM NH4HCO3 pH7) to yield 107b (9.6mg, 76%). LCMS: [M+H]+ = 611.53. 1H NMR (CDCI3 w/ 2drops CD3OD):
7.97 (s, 1H) 5.83 (d, J=9.9Hz, 1H) 5.28 (s, 1H) 4.58 (d, J=9.0Hz, 1H) 4.24 (d, J=9.3Hz, 2H) 3.42 (m, 3H) 2.60-2.95 (br, 7H) 2.20-2.58 (br, 6H) 1.76-2.20 (br, 11H) 1.40-1.56 (br, 12H) 1.02-1.20 (br, 12H) 0.40-1.10 (br, 27H) 0.04 (s, 8H). 13C NMR: 175.04, 170.53, 67.78, 53.74, 44.33, 36.79, 35.64, 31.69, 29.89, 24.86, 20.96, 20.49, 19.52, 15.95, 13.99, 10.65, 1.21
Figure imgf000097_0002
8b
EXAMPLE. Compound 108b. In a 25mL round bottom flask, 107b (9.6mg,
0.016 mmol) and pentafluorophenol (28.2mg, 0.153 mmol) were dissolved in dry
dichloromethane (5mL). N-cyclohexylcarbodiimide, N'- methyl polystyrene (33.4mg, 2.3 mmol/g, 0.077 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h under Argon. LCMS (10-100% ACN, 50mM NH4HCO3 pH7) indicated all of the starting material had been consumed and activated intermediate had been formed. The reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure, and the residue was dissolved in a solution of N,N-dimethylformamide (2mL) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (8μί, 0.046 mmol). PFP ester intermediate (6.0mg, 0.023 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h under argon. LCMS (10-100% ACN, 50mM NH4HC03 pH7) indicated all of the activated intermediate had been consumed and product had been formed. The reaction mixture was purified by preparative HPLC (10- 100% ACN, 50mM
NH4HC03 pH7) to yield 108b (4.7mg, 37%). LCMS: [M+H]+ m/z = 816.71. 1H NMR (CDC13, δ in ppm): 8.04 (s, 1H) 7.05 (d, J=8.4Hz, 2H) 6.80 (d, J=8.4Hz, 2H) 5.90 (m, 1H) 5.38 (d, J=10.2Hz, 1H) 4.63 (t, J=9.3Hz, 1H) 4.38 (br, 1H) 4.27 (d, J=9.9Hz, 1H) 3.48 (m, 1H) 3.34 (m, 2H) 2.86 (m, 6H) 2.56 (m, 3H) 2.23 (s, 3H) 2.16 (s, 3H) 1.22-2.10 (br, 16H) 1.12 (d, J=6.9Hz, 3H) 1.03 (d, J=6.6Hz, 3H) 0.88 (m, 14H). 13C NMR: 174.90, 170.44, 161.73, 155.52, 149.37, 130.77, 128.56, 124.33, 115.91, 70.40, 69.69, 67.62, 55.45, 53.70, 49.25, 44.61, 40.40, 36.94, 36.69, 35.93, 31.77, 31.16, 30.06, 24.94, 23.14, 21.08, 20.74, 20.20, 19.55, 17.78, 16.08, 14.05, 10.70
Figure imgf000098_0001
EXAMPLE. Compound 105c. Compound 4 (73.9 mg, 0.10 mmol) in n- pentanol (4 mL) was treated with n-Bu2SnO (2.10 mg, 0.0083 mmol, 8.0 mol %) at rt and the reaction was heated to 100°C for 2 days. The solvent was reduced to a minimum and the product was purified with CombiFlash (Teledyne Redisep Silica column, eluted with 0 to 15% of MeOH/DCM) to give 51.2 mg (64%) of intermediate 105c. LCMS: [M+H]+ m/z = 767.64. 1H NMR (CDC13, δ in ppm): 8.07 (m, 1H), 7.06 (t, J = 9.23Hz, 1H), 5.95 (d, J = 12.3Hz, 1H), 5.43 (d, J = 12.32Hz, 1H), 5.26 (d, J = 9.68Hz, 1H), 5.03 (dd, J = 8.36, 2.64Hz, 1H), 4.93 (dd, J = 8.36, 6.24Hz, 1H), 4.71 (dd, J = 15.83, 8.80Hz, 1H), 4.20-4.33 (m, 3H), 3.46 (m, 1H), 2.88 (d, J = 11.43Hz, 1H), 2.30-2.60 (m, 2H), 2.20 (s, 2H), 1.95-2.18 (m, 3H), 1.50-1.80 (m,6H), 1.10- 1.44 (m, 6H), 0.80- 1.04 (m, 13H), 0.50-0.77 (m, 6H).
Figure imgf000099_0001
106c
EXAMPLE. Compound 106c. The same procedure as for compound 106a was followed, intermediate 106c (14.9 mg, 38%) was obtained from 105c (51.2 mg). LCMS:
[M+H]+ m/z = 583.56. 1H NMR (CD3OD, δ in ppm): 7.97 (s, 1H), 5.27 (d, J = 9.67Hz, 1H), 4.67 (d, J = 9.23Hz, 1H), 4.58 (d, J = 9.68Hz, 1H), 3.53 (m, 3H), 2.80 (b, 1H), 2.58 (b, 4H), 1.48-2.18 (m, 13H), 1.10-1.4 -1.08 (m, 18H).
Figure imgf000099_0002
107c
EXAMPLE. Compound 107c. In a lOmL round bottom flask, 106c (14.9mg,
0.026 mmol) and acetic anhydride (20μΕ, 0.212 mmol) were dissolved in pyridine (ImL). This this solution was added a catalytic amount of dimethylaminopyridine (lmg, 0.008 mmol). This solution was stirred at room temperature for 16 h under argon. LCMS (10-100% ACN, 50mM NH4HC03 pH7) indicated all of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed. To the flask was added a 1: 1 mixture of 1,4-dioxane and water (0.4mL) and the solution was stirred for 10 min to hydrolyze any potential diacetate side product. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure, then purified by preparative HPLC (10-
100% ACN, 50mM NH4HC03 pH7) to yield 107c (4.8mg, 30%). LCMS: [M+H]+ m/z = 625.58. 1H NMR (CDC13 w/ 2drops CD3OD) 7.98 (s, 1H) 5.82 (d, J=10.8Hz, 1H) 5.26 (s, 11 4.57 (d, J=8.4Hz, 1H) 4.23 (d, J=8.4Hz, 2H) 3.42 (m, 3H) 2.60-2.92 (br, 8H) 2.15-2.40 (br, 4H) 1.90-2.12 (m, 7H) 1.38-1.90 (br, 14H) 1.00-1.38 (br, 13H) 0.50-1.00 (br, 22H), 0.03 (s, 13H). 13C NMR: 175.15, 150.56, 125.47, 69.55, 68.09, 55.33, 53.71, 44.59, 36.77, 35.74, 31.34, 30.19, 29.86, 29.32, 28.51, 24.84, 22.85, 22.55, 20.86, 20.40, 19.91, 15.94, 14.10, 10.63, 1.17
Figure imgf000100_0001
108c
EXAMPLE. Compound 108c. In a 25mL round bottom flask, 107c (4.8mg, 0.008 mmol) and pentafluorophenol (14.1mg, 0.077 mmol) were dissolved in dry
dichloromethane (5mL). N-cyclohexylcarbodiimide, /V-methyl polystyrene (16.7mg, 2.3 mmol/g, 0.038 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h under Argon. LC-MS (10-100% ACN, 50mM NH4HCO3 pH7) indicated all of the starting material had been consumed and activated intermediate had been formed. The reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure, and the residue was dissolved in a solution of N,N-dimethylformamide (2mL) and N, /V-diisopropylethylamine (4μί, 0.023 mmol). PFP ester intermediate (3.0mg, 0.012 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h under Argon. LC-MS (10- 100% ACN, 50mM NH4HCO3 pH7) indicated all of the activated intermediate had been consumed and product had been formed. The reaction mixture was purified by preparative HPLC (10- 100% ACN, 50mM NH4HCO3 pH7) to yield 108c (l . lmg, 17%). LCMS: [M+H]+ m/z = 830.76. 1H NMR (CDC13 w/ 2drops CD3OD): 8.00 (s, 1H) 7.01 (d, J=8.7Hz, 2H) 6.74 (d, J=8.4Hz, 2H) 5.89 (d,
J=12.6Hz, 1H) 5.25 (d, J=9.0Hz, 1H) 4.55 (d, J=8.7Hz, 1H) 4.30 (m, 3H) 3.39 (m, 3H) 3.21 (m, 2H) 2.81 (m, 3H) 2.04-2.60 (br, 45H) 1.76-2.04 (m, 5H) 1.34- 1.76 (br, 9H) 1.20 (m, 6H) 1.12 (d, J=7.2Hz, 4H) 1.01 (d, J=6.3Hz, 3H) 0.89 (t, J=7.1Hz, 6H) 0.78 (m, 6H)
Figure imgf000101_0001
114b
EXAMPLE. Compound 114b. In a 5mL round bottom flask, 113 (lO.Omg, 0.009 mmol) was dissolved in a solution of trifluoroacetic acid (125μΕ, 1.632 mmol) and dichloromethane (0.5mL) and stirred at room temperature for 1 hr under argon, then 1-butanol (200μΕ, 2.186mmol) added and reaction mixture stirred at room temperature for 30 min under argon. LCMS (10-100% ACN, 50mM NH4HC03 pH7) indicated all of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed. The reaction mixture was purified by preparative HPLC (10-100% ACN, 50mM NH4HC03 pH7) to yield 114b (3.2mg, 32%).
LCMS: [M+H]+ m/z = 1088.79. 1H NMR (CDC13 w/ 2drops CD3OD): 8.86 (s, 1H) 8.47 (d, J=8.0Hz, 1H) 7.99 (s, 1H) 7.31 (d, J=9.5Hz, 2H) 7.01 (d, J=7.5Hz, 2H) 6.73 (d, J=8.5Hz, 2H) 5.94 (d, J=10.5Hz, 1H) 5.34 (d, J=10.0Hz, 1H) 4.58 (m, 3H) 4.38 (t, J=6.0Hz, 4H), 4.27 (d, J= 10.0Hz, 2H) 3.37 (m, 2H) 3.18 (m, 2H) 3.09 (t, J=6.3Hz, 3H) 2.70-2.90 (br, 6H) 2.43 (dd, J=11.0Hz, 3.0Hz, 2H) 2.26-2.36 (br, 4H) 2.12-2.22 (br, 10H) 2.02-2.12 (br, 2H) 1.86-2.02 (br, 11H) 1.69-1.80 (br, 6H) 1.54-1.69 (br, 10H) 1.34-1.52 (br, 12H) 1.09-1.34 (br, 16H) 1.047 (dd, J=15.0Hz, 6.5Hz, 19H) 0.88 (m, 19H) 0.75 (m, 17H). 13C NMR: 174.95, 174.59, 170.64, 170.23, 161.92, 156.91, 156.06, 153.88, 149.00, 133.77, 130.79, 123.92, 120.98, 115.53, 69.95, 69.61, 67.03, 63.82, 55.32, 53.21, 44.78, 41.42, 40.40, 36.84, 36.38, 35.62, 35.22, 31.54, 31.40, 30.37, 24.99, 24.66, 23.20, 20.68, 20.24, 19.56, 19.27, 17.69, 15.71, 13.72, 10.35
Figure imgf000102_0001
114c
EXAMPLE. Compound 114c. In a 5mL round bottom flask, 113 (10. Omg, 0.009 mmol) was dissolved in a solution of trifluoroacetic acid (125μΕ, 1.632 mmol) and dichloromethane (0.5mL) and stirred at room temperature for 1 hr under argon, then 1-pentanol (200μΕ, 1.840 mmol) added and reaction mixture stirred at room temperature for 30 min under argon. LC-MS (10-100% ACN, 50mM NH4HC03 pH7) indicated all of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed. The reaction mixture was purified by preparative HPLC (10-100% ACN, 50mM NH4HC03 pH7) to yield 114c (3.6mg, 36%).
+ m/z = 1102.77.
Figure imgf000102_0002
117b EXAMPLE. Compound 117b. In a 25mL round bottom flask, 114b (3.2mg, 0.003 mmol) was dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide (2mL). A solution of 116 (4.9mg, 0.003 mmol) in 20mM, pH7, sodium phosphate buffer (2mL) was added dropwise, stirring at room temperature with argon bubbling for 30 min. LCMS (10-100% ACN, 50mM NH4HC03 pH7) indicated all of the starting material had been consumed and product had been formed. The reaction mixture was purified by preparative HPLC (10-100% ACN, 50mM NH4HC03 pH7) to yield 117b (4.3mg, 56%). LCMS: [M+H]+ m/z =1306.82. 1H NMR (9: 1 DMSO-d6:D20): 8.60 (s, IH) 8.14 (s, IH) 7.59 (d, J=8.5Hz, 2H) 6.94 (d, J=7.5Hz, 2H) 6.60 (dd, J=13.3Hz, 8.8Hz, 3H) 5.77 (d, J=11.5Hz, IH) 5.20 (d, J=9.5Hz, IH) 4.46 (m, 3H) 4.00-4.40 (br, 12H) 3.48-3.62 (br, 11H) 3.28-3.48 (br, 12H) 3.10-3.28 (br, 4H) 2.80-3.08 (br, 7H) 2.60-3.80 (br, 3H) 2.48 (s, IH) 2.26-2.40 (br, 2H) 2.00-2.26 (br, 19H) 1.58-2.00 (br, 20H) 1.28-1.58 (br, 8H) 1.18 (q, J=7.5Hz, 3H) 0.84-1.10 (br, 8H) 0.75 (m, 9H) 0.60 (d, J=6.5Hz, 3H). 13C NMR: 175.25, 174.93, 174.36, 173.59, 173.22, 172.76, 172.70, 172.02, 171.85, 171.67, 170.85, 170.34, 169.68, 166.48, 161.94, 160.67, 156.42, 155.80, 154.22, 150.98, 149.56, 149.21, 149.08, 130.64, 129.17, 128.69, 128.08, 124.89, 122.00, 115.31, 111.84, 72.31, 72.23, 71.82, 71.69, 69.84, 69.74, 68.21, 66.59, 63.52, 63.09, 55.04, 53.74, 53.56, 53.23, 52.96, 52.48, 46.11, 4
Figure imgf000103_0001
109 EXAMPLE. Compound 109. 1.1 g of dipeptide 1 (2.77 mmole), was mixed with 53mg (0.21mmole, 0.08 eq) of n-Bu2SnO in 15 mL of benzyl alcohol and heated to 130 °C for 2 ½ hours, then 100 °C overnight. LC/MS showed no starting material left. The reaction mixture was loaded onto a 330 g of Combiflash column, purified with petroleum ether/EtOAc to give some clean fractions. Mixed fractions were repurified to give a combined yield of 0.67 g (51%) of pure benzyl ester 109. LCMS: [M+H]+ m/z = 474.46. 1H NMR (CDC13, 5 in ppm): 8.12 (s, 1 H), 7.46-7.43 (m, 2 H), 7.40-7.32 (m, 3 H), 6.68 (d, J = 9.6 Hz, 1 H), 5.41(d, J = 12.3 Hz, 1 H), 5.36 (d, J = 12.3 Hz, 1 H), 5.24 (d, J = 4.5 Hz, 1 H), 4.87(m, 1 H), 4.02-3.90 (m, 2 H), 2.24-2.13 (m, 2 H), 1.88-1.78 (m, 2 H), 1.42-1.30 (m, 2 H), 1.07 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 3 H), 0.97-0.90 (m, 9 H). 13C NMR (CDC13, δ in ppm): 176.1, 170.2, 161.3, 146.5, 135.7, 128.6, 128.5, 128.4, 127.8, 69.6, 68.8, 66.9, 51.6, 41.1, 38.6, 31.8, 24.1, 19.7, 18.3, 16.0, 11.7.
Figure imgf000104_0001
1 10
EXAMPLE. Compound 110. 0.67 g (1.42 mmole) of dipeptide benzyl ester 109 was dissolved in 5 mL dichloromethane. To this solution was added 263 μΐ^ of TESC1 (236 mg, 1.56 mmole, 1.1 eq), and 117 mg (1.72 mmole, 1.2 eq) of imidazole. The reaction was stirred at 0 °C and solid formed. After 2 hours, the solid was filtered away and the filtrate was concentrated. The residue was on the Combiflash (24 g of silica column) with petroleum ether/EtOAC. After concentration, 763 mg (92%) of the desired product 110 was recovered. 1H NMR (CDC13, δ in ppm): 8.12 (s, 1 H), 7.46-7.43 (m, 2 H), 7.40-7.32 (m, 3 H), 6.68 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 5.41(d, J = 12.3 Hz, 1 H), 5.36(d, J = 12.3 Hz, 1 H), 5.13 (t, J = 5.7 Hz, 1 H), 4.03-3.95 (m, 1 H), 3.83 (d, 1 H), 2.20-2.05 (m, 1 H), 1.95-1.86 (m, 2 H), 1.48-1.38 (m, 1 H), 1.30-1.20 (m, 2 H), 1.03 (d, 3 H), 0.96-0.82 (m, 18 H), 0.65 (t, 6 H). 13C NMR (CDC13, δ in ppm): 178.2, 168.4, 161.1, 146.5, 135.7, 128.6, 128.5, 128.4, 127.7, 70.7, 70.1, 66.9, 51.3, 39.9, 38.3, 31.6, 24.2, 18.3, 17.6, 16.0, 11.5, 6.8, 4.6. O ^\ OSiEt3
111
EXAMPLE. Compound 111. 746 mg (1.27 mmole) of TES protected dipeptide benzyl ester 110 was dissolved in 8 mL of THF (anhydrous, inhibitor-free) and cooled to - 45 ° C. After 15 minutes of cooling, 2.8 mL of 0.5 M KHMDS (1.1 eq., 1.4 mmole) in toluene solution was added dropwise. After an additional 15 mins, 175 μΐ^ of chloromethyl butyrate (1.1 eq., 1.4 mmole) was added dropwise. After 30 mins, TLC showed only a trace amount of starting material left. After 2 hours, the reaction mixture was quenched 1 mL MeOH, and allowed to warm to room temperature. The reaction was extracted with EtO Ac/brine. The organic layer was washed with brine and then concentrated to give 759 mg (87%) of crude product 111. LCMS: [M+Na]+ m/z = 710.57. 1H NMR (CDC13, δ in ppm) 8.10 (s, 1 H), 7.44- 7.40 (m, 2 H), 7.39-7.30 (m, 3 H), 5.43(d, J = 12.3 Hz, 1 H), 5.37(d, J = 12.3 Hz, 1 H), 5.35 (s, 2 H), 4.98 (t, J = 5.1 Hz, 1 H), 4.40-4.20 (br, 1 H), 3.52 (d, J = 16.0 Hz, 1 H), 2.42-2.38 (t, J = 6.7 Hz, 2 H), 2.25-2.05 (m, 2 H), 1.78-1.72 (m, 2 H), 1.68-1.55 (m, 3 H), 1.30- 1.20 (m, 1 H), 1.00-0.85 (m, 24 H), 0.65 (t, 6 H). 13C NMR (CDC13, δ in ppm) 177.6, 173.0, 171.0, 161.1, 146.6, 135.7, 128.6, 128.42, 128.36, 127.6, 77.2, 70.8, 66.8, 63.5, 40.9, 35.9, 34.9, 31.1, 25.0, 20.1, 19.5, 18.1, 15.7, 13
Figure imgf000105_0001
112
EXAMPLE. Compound 112. 239 mg of MEP (1.67 mmole, 1.5 eq), 316 mg of EDC (1.65mmole, 1.5 eq), and 300 mg of pentafluorophenol (1.63 mmole, 1.5eq) were dissolved in 8 mL of N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone. The reaction was stirred overnight. 759 mg (1.1 mmole) of the alkylated dipeptide 111 in 1 mL NMP was then added. An additional 0.8 mL of NMP was used to rinse the flask/syringe to transfer residue to the hydrogenation flask. 60 mg (0.05 eq) of 10% Pd/C was then added and the reaction mixture was hydrogenated at 35 PSI, overnight. LC/MS showed the major product is the benzyl ester, along with 10% free acid. The reaction was filtered through celite, and the filter cake was washed with EtO Ac. The filtrate was extracted with brine, washed with brine, and concentrated. Combiflash purification with petroleum ether/EtOAc resulted in the recovery of 215 mg (25%) of pure benzyl ester 112. LCMS: [M+H]+ m/z = 787.66. 1H NMR (CDC13, δ in ppm): 8.09 (s, 1 H), 7.44-7.40 (m, 2 H), 7.39-7.30 (m, 3 H), 7.07 (d, J = 15.5 Hz, 1 H), 5.93 (d, J = 12.3 Hz, 1 H), 5.42 (d, J = 12.3 Hz, 1 H), 5.34 (s, 2 H), 4.93 (dd, J = 8.4, 2.7 Hz, 1 H), 4.70-4.60 (m, 1 H), 4.50-4.30 (br, 1 H), 2.88 (m, 1 H), 2.60-2.28 (m, 4 H), 2.21 (s, 3 H), 2.08-1.89 (m, 4 H), 1.80-1.40 (m, 8 H), 1.36- 1.1.07 (m, 3 H), 1.00-0.80 (m, 21 H), 0.77 (d, 3 H), 0.65 (t, 6 H). 13C NMR (CDC13, 5 in ppm): 177.5, 175.1, 174.1, 173.0, 161.1, 146.5, 135.8, 128.6, 128.4, 128.3, 127.6, 77.2, 70.7, 69.5, 69.2, 66.7, 57.3, 55.4, 53.5, 53.4, 44.8, 41.3, 36.8, 35.9, 31.4, 30.3, 25.0, 24.7, 23.2,
Figure imgf000106_0001
EC1602 EC1633
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC 1759. Paraformaldehyde (1.5g, 1.25 eq) was added to 16 mL of TMSBr. The resulted suspension was cooled to 0°C, and 1-pentanol (4.36 mL, 40 mmole, 1 equiv.) was added dropwise. The reaction was stirred at 0°C and warmed up to room temperature. After overnight, TMSBr was evaporated under reduced pressure.
Vacuum distillation of the residue was carried out at 7 mm Hg pressure, the fraction came out at 56°C was the desired product EC 1759 (4.3 g, 59%).
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1760. 1.58 g (3.09 mmole) TES-dipeptide
EC0997was dissolved in 12 mL THF( anhydrous, inhibitor-free). The resulted solution was cooled to -45°C. To the solution, 6.5 mL of 0.5 M KHMDS in toulene(3.25 mmole, 1.05 equiv.) was added dropwise. After finishing the addition, the reaction mixture was stirred at -
45°C for 15 minutes. 600 μΐ^ of bromomethyl pentyl ether EC1759 (4.1 mmole, 1.33 equiv.) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was warmed from -45°C to -10°C in 90 minutes, then quenched with 10% NaCl/l%NaHC03 aqueous solution, extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase was washed with 10% NaCl/l%NaHC03 aqueous solution three times, then brine. The separated organic phase was dried over Na2S04. Na2S04 was filtered off and the solvent was evaporated under vacuum to give 2.4 g of crude product. The crude product was purified with EtO Ac/petroleum ether to give 1.47 g of product EC 1760 (78%)
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1761. 0.38 g of MEP (2.65 mmole, 1.4 equiv.) was suspended in 1.2 mL NMP, 0.53 g of PFP (2.88mmole, 1.5 equiv.) and 0.55 g of EDC (2.87 mmole, 1.5 equiv.) were added. The reactionmixture was stirred overnight in a hydrogenation vessel.
1.17 g (1.91 mmole) of alkylated dipeptide EC1760 was dissolved in 0.3 mL NMP and transferred to the above hydrogenation vessel, and the residue of the dipeptide was rinsed with 0.3 mL NMP and transferred to the hydrogenation vessel. 154 mg of 10% Pd/C (dry, 0.05 equiv.) was added to the solution. The hydrogenation was carried out at 35 PSI. After 5 hrs, LC/MS showed there was no starting material. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite pad and the reaction vessel was washed with EtO Ac and filtered through celite pad. The combined solution was washed with 10% NaCl/l%Na2C03 solution to remove PFP, then with brine. The organic phase was dried over Na2S04. Na2S04 was filtered off and the solvent was evaporated under vacuum to give 1.20 g (88%) of crude product EC1761.
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1602. 1.17 g (1.65 mmole) of tripeptide ester
EC1761 was dissolved in 15 mL MeOH, the solution was cooled to 0°C. 300 mg of LiOH hydrate (7.15 mmole, 4.3 equiv.) dissolved in 5 mL H20 was added to the ester solution, the resulted reaction mixture was stirred and warmed up to room temperature in 2 hours. LC/MS showed no starting material left. MeOH was removed using rotary evaporator, and the residual was worked up by extraction between EtO Ac/brine. The organic phase was dried over
Na2S04. Na2S04 was filtered off and the solvent was evaporated under vacuum to give 0.80 g (83%) of crude product EC1602.
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1633. 0.80 g (1.37 mmole) of tripeptide acid EC1602 was dissolved in 6.4 mL of pyridine, the solution was cooled to 0°C. 6.0 mg (0.049 mmole, 0.035 equiv) DMAP was added and then 2 mL of acetic anhydride (21.2 mmole, 15.5 equiv) was added, the reaction mixture was warmed up to room temperature in 5 hours and stored in -20 0°C for 2 days. 20 mL dioxane/20 mL H20 was added to the reaction mixture at 0°C and stirred for 1 hour. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. 20 mL of phosphate buffer (20 mM) and 5 mL acetonitrile were added to the residue, the pH of the resulted solution was adjusted to 5.4 using saturated NaHC03 solution. The solution was loaded on Biotage 120 g C18 column. The flask containing the crude product was rinsed with 1 mL acetonitrile/5 mL phosphate buffer and loaded on the column. The purification was done using a gradient from 20% ACN/80% water to 70% ACN/30%. The fractions containing the desired product were combined and ACN was evaporated under reduced pressure. There were white precipitate coming out from solution, brine was added to the suspension and EtOAc was used to extract the desired product. The organic phase was dried over Na2S04. Na2S04 was filtered off and the solvent was evaporated under vacuum to give 0.49 g (57 %) of product EC163
Figure imgf000108_0001
Scheme 2 (R, Rl = alkyl)
Figure imgf000109_0001
Scheme 3 (R = alkyl)
EXAMPLE. General Procedures:
Synthesis of EC 1623 (Scheme 2). EC 1008 (I: Ri = n-propyl. 103 mg) was dissolved in anhydrous dichloromethane (DCM, 2.0 mL) and to this solution was added trifluoroacetic acid (TFA, 0.50 mL). The resulting solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 20 minutes, and to which was added 1-pentanol (0.72 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 minutes, concentrated on a Buchi Rotavapor at 30°C for 10 minutes, residue stirred at ambient temperature under high vacuum for 75 minutes, and to which was added saturated NaHC03 solution (10 mL) with vigorous stirring, followed by addition of acetonitrile (ACN, 3.0 mL). The resulting white suspension was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 minutes and let stand to settle. The top clear solution was loaded onto a Biotage SNAP 12 g KP-C18-HS column on a Biotage system. The white solid left in the reaction flask was dissolved in water (5.0 mL) and the solution was also loaded onto the Biotage column. The remaining solid stuck on the glass wall of the reaction flask was dissolved in ACN (2.0 mL). To this solution was added water (6.0 mL) and the resulting cloudy solution was loaded onto the same Biotage column. The reaction mixture was eluted following these parameters: Flow rate: 15 mL/min. A: water; B: CAN. Method: 25% B 2 CV (column volume), 25-50% B 3 CV, and 50% B 5 CV (1 CV = 15 mL). Fractions containing the desired product was collected and freeze-dried to afford EC1623 (II: R = n-pentyl. 95.9 mg) as a white powder.
Synthesis of EC1662 (Scheme 3).
Step 1: Anhydrous DCM (5.0 mL) was added to a mixture of EC 1623 (II: R = n-pentyl. 114 mg), pentafluorophenol (PFP, 67.3 mg), and DCC-resin (2.3 mmol/g, 396 mg) and the suspension was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 23 hours. The resin was filtered off and washed with anhydrous DCM (3.0 mL) and the combined filtrates were concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue, which was vacuumed at ambient temperature for 1 hour prior to use in Step 3.
Step 2: EC1426 (114 mg) was dissolved in anhydrous DCM (1.5 mL) and to which was added TFA (0.50 mL). The resulting solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 70 minutes and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue, which was co-evaporated with anhydrous DCM (2.0 mL x 3) and vacuumed at ambient temperature for 9 hours prior to use in Step 3.
Step 3: The residue from Step 1 was dissolved in anhydrous DCM (1.5 mL) and to this solution was added DIPEA (0.50 mL) followed by a solution of the residue from Step 2 dissolved in anhydrous dimethylformamide (DMF, 1.5 mL). The resulting solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 1 hour, diluted with ethyl acetate (EtOAc, 60 mL), and washed with brine (20 mL x 3). The organic layer was separated, dried (Na2S04), and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue, which was vacuumed at ambient temperature for 2 hours, dissolved in DCM (3.5 mL), and loaded onto a 24 g silica gel column on a CombiFlash system for purification. The materials were eluted with 0-5% MeOH in DCM to afford EC1662 (III: R = n-pentyl. 171 mg) as a white solid.
EXAMPLE. Synthesis of EC1664 (Scheme 3). A solution of EC1454
(SPACER-SH; See Figure 1 for structure. 44.1 mg.) in 20 mM phosphate buffer (pH 7.0, 4.0 mL) was added to a solution of EC1662 (24.1 mg) in MeOH (4.8 mL), followed by addition of saturated Na2S04 (0.30 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 30 minutes and the solution was injected onto a preparative HPLC (A: 50 M NH4HCO3 buffer, pH 7.0; B: CAN. Method: 10-80% B in 20 minutes.) for purification.
Fractions containing the desired product were collected and freeze-dried to afford EC 1664 (IV: R = n- entyl. 42.8 mg) as a fluffy yellow solid.
Figure imgf000111_0001
Figure 2
The ether analogs of compounds 111 and 112 can be used to prep tubulysin intermediates described herein.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A rocess for preparing a compound of the formula
Figure imgf000112_0001
or a salt or solvate thereof; wherein
Ari is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
L is selected from the group consisting of
-(CR2)pCRaRb
Figure imgf000112_0002
, and
where p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
RA, RB, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of RA, RB, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring;
RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
Y is acyloxy or R120;
R3 is optionally substituted alkyl;
R4 is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R5 and R6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl;
R7 is optionally substituted alkyl;
R12 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted;
- I l l - and
n is 1, 2, 3, or 4;
wherein the process comprises
the step of treating a compound of formula A with triethylsilyl chloride and imidazole in an aprotic solvent, where Rg is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000113_0001
or
the step of treating a compound of formula B with a base and a compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 in an aprotic solvent at a temperature from about -78°C to about 0°C; wherein the molar ratio of the compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 to the compound of formula B from about 1 to about 1.5, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000113_0002
B
or
the steps of
a) preparing a compound of formula (El) from a compound of formula (E), where X1 is a leaving group
Figure imgf000113_0003
E E1
and
b) treating a compound of formula C under reducing conditions in the presence of the compound of formula El, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000113_0004
or
the step of treating compound of formula D with a hydrolase enzyme or with a trialkyltin hydroxide, where R is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000114_0001
or
the step of treatin a compound of formula Fl with a non-basic fluoride reagent
Figure imgf000114_0002
or
the step of treating a compound of formula Gl with an acylating agent of formula R4C(0)X2, where X2 is a leaving group
Figure imgf000114_0003
G 1
or
the steps of
c) forming an active ester intermediate from a com ound of formula HI
Figure imgf000114_0004
H 1
and
d) reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I
Figure imgf000114_0005
or combinations thereof.
2. The process of claim 1 comprising the step of treating a compound of formula A with triethylsilyl chloride and imidazole in an aprotic solvent, where R8 is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000115_0001
3. The process of claim 1 comprising the step of treating a compound of formula B with a base and a compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 in an aprotic solvent at a temperature from about -78°C to about 0°C; wherein the molar ratio of the compound of the formula C1CH20C(0)R2 to the compound of formula B from about 1 to about 1.5, where Rg is C 1 - C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000115_0002
B
4. The process of claim 1 comprising the steps of
a) preparing a compound of formula (El) from a compound of formula E, where Xi is a leaving group
Figure imgf000115_0003
and
b) treating a compound of formula C under reducing conditions in the presence of the compound of formula EL, where Rg is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000115_0004
5. The process of claim 1 comprising the step of treating a compound of formula D with a hydrolase enzyme or a trialkyltin hydroxide, where Rg is C1-C6 unbranched alkyl
Figure imgf000116_0001
6. The process of claim 1 comprising the step of treating a compound of formula Gl with an acylating agent of formula R4C(0)X2, where X2 is a leaving group
Figure imgf000116_0002
G 1
7. The process of claim 1 comprising the steps of
c) forming an active ester intermediate from a compound of formula HI
Figure imgf000116_0003
and
d) reacting the active ester intermediate with a compound of the formula I
Figure imgf000116_0004
8. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein L is
Figure imgf000116_0005
The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein O-L-S
Figure imgf000116_0006
10. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein O-L-S is
Figure imgf000117_0001
11. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein Y is acyloxy.
12. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein Y is R2C(0)0, where R2 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl and optionally substituted cycloalkyl.
13. The process of claim 12 wherein R2 is C1-C8 alkyl or C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
14. The process of claim 12 wherein R2 is n-butyl.
15. The process of any one of the claims 1 to 7 wherein R3 is C1-C4 alkyl.
16. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein R3 is methyl.
17. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein Α is optionally substituted aryl.
18. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein Ar is phenyl or hydroxyphenyl.
19. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein Α is 4-hydroxyphenyl.
20. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein R4 is C1-C8 alkyl or
C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
21. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein R4 is methyl.
22. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein R5 is branched C3-C6 or C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
23. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein R5 is iso-propyl.
24. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein R6 is branched C3-C6 or C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
25. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein R5 is sec -butyl.
26. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein R7 is C1-C6 alkyl.
27. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein R7 is methyl.
28. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein Ar2 is optionally substituted heteroaryl.
29. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein Ar2 is substituted pyridyl.
30. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein Ar2 is substituted 2- pyridyl.
31. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein Ar2 is 3-nitro-2-pyridyl.
32. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein R2 is CH2CH(CH3)2, CH2CH2CH3, CH2CH3, CH=C(CH3)2, or CH3.
33. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein is substituted phenyl.
34. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein Ar is 4-substituted phenyl.
35. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein Α is RA- substituted phenyl.
36. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein Ar is 4-hydroxyphenyl, or a hydroxyl protected form thereof.
37. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein L is -(CR2)pCRaRb-.
38. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein p is 1.
39. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein Ra and Rb are each hydrogen.
40. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein m is 1.
41. The process of any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein R is hydrogen.
42. A compound of the formula
D /NH R3 M O Ar2 or a salt or solvate thereof;
wherein
A i is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
Ar2 is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
L is selected from the group consisting of
-(CR2)PCRaRb-,
Figure imgf000118_0001
, where p is an integer from about 1 to about 3, m is an integer from about 1 to about 4, and * indicates the points of attachment;
Ra, Rb, and R are each independently selected in each instance from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; or any two of Ra, Rb, and R are taken together with the attached carbon atom(s) to form a carbocyclic ring; RAT represents 0 to 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of amino, or derivatives thereof, hydroxy or derivatives thereof, halo, thio or derivatives thereof, alkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, nitro, sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof, carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof;
R3 is optionally substituted alkyl; and
R9 is hydrogen or an amine protecting group.
43. The compound of claim 42 wherein Α is optionally substituted aryl.
44. The compound of claim 42 wherein Ar2 is optionally substituted heteroaryl;
45. The compound of claim 42 wherein Ar2 is substituted pyridyl.
46. The compound of claim 42 wherein Ar2 is substituted 2-pyridyl.
47. The compound of claim 42 wherein Ar2 is 3-nitro-2-pyridyl.
48. The compound of claim 42 wherein An is 4-substituted phenyl.
PCT/US2013/034672 2012-03-29 2013-03-29 Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof WO2013149185A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA2868494A CA2868494A1 (en) 2012-03-29 2013-03-29 Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof
JP2015503659A JP2015518473A (en) 2012-03-29 2013-03-29 Tubulin derivative and method for producing the same
US14/388,311 US9505747B2 (en) 2012-03-29 2013-03-29 Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof
EP13770372.4A EP2831059B1 (en) 2012-03-29 2013-03-29 Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201261617386P 2012-03-29 2012-03-29
US61/617,386 2012-03-29
US201261684450P 2012-08-17 2012-08-17
US61/684,450 2012-08-17
US201361771451P 2013-03-01 2013-03-01
US61/771,451 2013-03-01
US201361794720P 2013-03-15 2013-03-15
US61/794,720 2013-03-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2013149185A1 true WO2013149185A1 (en) 2013-10-03

Family

ID=49261307

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2013/034672 WO2013149185A1 (en) 2012-03-29 2013-03-29 Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (2) US20140080175A1 (en)
EP (1) EP2831059B1 (en)
JP (1) JP2015518473A (en)
CA (1) CA2868494A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2013149185A1 (en)

Cited By (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2014134543A1 (en) * 2013-03-01 2014-09-04 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysins
WO2015113760A1 (en) * 2014-01-28 2015-08-06 Tube Pharmaceuticals Gmbh Cytotoxic tubulysin compounds for conjugation
WO2015160833A1 (en) * 2014-04-14 2015-10-22 Endocyte, Inc. Drug delivery conjugates for treating resistant cancer and for use in combination therapy
WO2016138288A1 (en) 2015-02-25 2016-09-01 William Marsh Rice University Desacetoxytubulysin h and analogs thereof
US9505747B2 (en) 2012-03-29 2016-11-29 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof
US9550734B2 (en) 2004-07-23 2017-01-24 Endocyte, Inc. Bivalent linkers and conjugates thereof
US9555139B2 (en) 2007-03-14 2017-01-31 Endocyte, Inc. Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins
US9662402B2 (en) 2012-10-16 2017-05-30 Endocyte, Inc. Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
JP2017533887A (en) * 2014-09-17 2017-11-16 ジェネンテック， インコーポレイテッド Pyrrolobenzodiazepines and their antibody disulfide conjugates
US9877965B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2018-01-30 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
US10080805B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2018-09-25 Purdue Research Foundation Cholecystokinin B receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
US10738086B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2020-08-11 Endocyte Inc. Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
EP3858341A1 (en) 2012-11-15 2021-08-04 Endocyte, Inc. Psma ligand-containing conjugates for the treatment of prostate cancer
US11229708B2 (en) 2015-12-04 2022-01-25 Seagen Inc. Conjugates of quaternized tubulysin compounds
US11274124B2 (en) 2017-11-29 2022-03-15 William Marsh Rice University Tubulysin analogues as anticancer agents and payloads for antibody-drug conjugates and methods of treatment therewith
US11793880B2 (en) 2015-12-04 2023-10-24 Seagen Inc. Conjugates of quaternized tubulysin compounds

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017031209A1 (en) * 2015-08-18 2017-02-23 Endocyte, Inc. Tubulysin analogs and methods
EP3898651A2 (en) * 2018-12-21 2021-10-27 Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tubulysins and protein-tubulysin conjugates

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060128754A1 (en) * 2002-11-21 2006-06-15 Gerhard Hoefle Tubulysins, method for producing the same and tubulysin preparations
WO2011069116A1 (en) * 2009-12-04 2011-06-09 Endocyte, Inc. Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins
WO2011106639A1 (en) * 2010-02-25 2011-09-01 Purdue Research Foundation Psma binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
WO2012019123A1 (en) * 2010-08-06 2012-02-09 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysins

Family Cites Families (201)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2515483A (en) 1946-08-10 1950-07-18 Merck & Co Inc Diacylated pteroic acid and process for preparing same
US2816110A (en) 1956-11-23 1957-12-10 Merck & Co Inc Methods for the production of substituted pteridines
US3392173A (en) 1964-03-09 1968-07-09 Lilly Co Eli Novel acyl derivatives of desacetyl-vincaleukoblastine and processes for their preparation
US3387001A (en) 1964-10-19 1968-06-04 Lilly Co Eli Novel aminoacyl esters of desacetyl vincaleukoblastine
US4203898A (en) 1977-08-29 1980-05-20 Eli Lilly And Company Amide derivatives of VLB, leurosidine, leurocristine and related dimeric alkaloids
US4166810A (en) 1978-04-20 1979-09-04 Eli Lilly And Company Derivatives of 4-desacetyl VLB C-3 carboxyhydrazide
US4337339A (en) 1979-04-30 1982-06-29 Baker Instruments Corp. Process for preparation of folic acid derivatives
US4639456A (en) 1980-06-10 1987-01-27 Omnichem S.A. Vinblastin-23-oyl amino acid derivatives
US4316885A (en) 1980-08-25 1982-02-23 Ayerst, Mckenna And Harrison, Inc. Acyl derivatives of rapamycin
US4713249A (en) 1981-11-12 1987-12-15 Schroeder Ulf Crystallized carbohydrate matrix for biologically active substances, a process of preparing said matrix, and the use thereof
US5140104A (en) 1982-03-09 1992-08-18 Cytogen Corporation Amine derivatives of folic acid analogs
EP0116208B1 (en) 1982-12-07 1988-03-30 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Mitomycin analogues
GR81790B (en) 1983-04-29 1984-12-12 Omnichem Sa
JPS59175493U (en) 1983-05-12 1984-11-22 株式会社小松製作所 Laser processing equipment
US4866180A (en) 1984-02-24 1989-09-12 Bristol-Myers Company Amino disulfide thiol exchange products
GB8413849D0 (en) 1984-05-31 1984-07-04 Amersham Int Plc Nmr contrast agents
JPS60255789A (en) 1984-06-01 1985-12-17 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co Ltd Mitomycin derivative, its preparation, and antitumor agent
US5266333A (en) 1985-03-06 1993-11-30 American Cyanamid Company Water dispersible and water soluble carbohydrate polymer compositions for parenteral administration of growth hormone
US4650803A (en) 1985-12-06 1987-03-17 University Of Kansas Prodrugs of rapamycin
ZA873600B (en) 1986-05-27 1988-12-28 Lilly Co Eli Immunoglobulin conjugates
US4801688A (en) 1986-05-27 1989-01-31 Eli Lilly And Company Hydrazone immunoglobulin conjugates
DE3750846T2 (en) 1986-08-29 1995-05-11 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Kk MITOMYCIN DERIVATIVES.
US5094849A (en) 1988-08-08 1992-03-10 Eli Lilly And Company Cytotoxic antibody conjugates of hydrazide derivatized vinca analogs via simple organic linkers
US5006652A (en) 1988-08-08 1991-04-09 Eli Lilly And Company Intermediates for antibody-vinca drug conjugates
US5108921A (en) 1989-04-03 1992-04-28 Purdue Research Foundation Method for enhanced transmembrane transport of exogenous molecules
US5688488A (en) 1989-04-03 1997-11-18 Purdue Research Foundation Composition and method for tumor imaging
CA2044590A1 (en) 1989-11-13 1991-05-14 Marc D. Better Chimeric mouse-human a10 antibody with specificity to a human tumor cell antigen
US5627165A (en) 1990-06-13 1997-05-06 Drug Innovation & Design, Inc. Phosphorous prodrugs and therapeutic delivery systems using same
US5998603A (en) 1994-09-29 1999-12-07 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4'-desmethyl nucleoside analogs, and oligomers thereof
ES2171392T3 (en) 1990-08-29 2002-09-16 Ct Hospitalier Regional De Nan PROTEIN POLYGANDS UNITED TO A STABLE PROTEIN NUCLEUS.
US5378696A (en) 1990-09-19 1995-01-03 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin esters
US5130307A (en) 1990-09-28 1992-07-14 American Home Products Corporation Aminoesters of rapamycin
US5221670A (en) 1990-09-19 1993-06-22 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin esters
US5233036A (en) 1990-10-16 1993-08-03 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin alkoxyesters
US5120842A (en) 1991-04-01 1992-06-09 American Home Products Corporation Silyl ethers of rapamycin
US5100883A (en) 1991-04-08 1992-03-31 American Home Products Corporation Fluorinated esters of rapamycin
US5118678A (en) 1991-04-17 1992-06-02 American Home Products Corporation Carbamates of rapamycin
US5194447A (en) 1992-02-18 1993-03-16 American Home Products Corporation Sulfonylcarbamates of rapamycin
US5138051A (en) 1991-08-07 1992-08-11 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin analogs as immunosuppressants and antifungals
US5118677A (en) 1991-05-20 1992-06-02 American Home Products Corporation Amide esters of rapamycin
US5169851A (en) 1991-08-07 1992-12-08 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin analog as immunosuppressants and antifungals
US6335434B1 (en) 1998-06-16 2002-01-01 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Nucleosidic and non-nucleosidic folate conjugates
US5151413A (en) 1991-11-06 1992-09-29 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin acetals as immunosuppressant and antifungal agents
US5159079A (en) 1991-12-20 1992-10-27 Eli Lilly And Company 2-piperidones as intermediates for 5-deaza-10-oxo- and 5-deaza-10-thio-5,6,7,8-tetrahydrofolic acids
US6004555A (en) 1992-03-05 1999-12-21 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Methods for the specific coagulation of vasculature
US6022966A (en) 1993-11-22 2000-02-08 Neorx Corporation Pretargeting methods and compounds
US5302584A (en) 1992-10-13 1994-04-12 American Home Products Corporation Carbamates of rapamycin
US5258389A (en) 1992-11-09 1993-11-02 Merck & Co., Inc. O-aryl, O-alkyl, O-alkenyl and O-alkynylrapamycin derivatives
US5260300A (en) 1992-11-19 1993-11-09 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin carbonate esters as immuno-suppressant agents
US5583020A (en) 1992-11-24 1996-12-10 Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Permeability enhancers for negatively charged polynucleotides
ES2176245T3 (en) 1993-04-23 2002-12-01 Wyeth Corp OPEN CYCLE RAMAPICIN ANTIBODIES.
US7279561B1 (en) 1993-04-23 2007-10-09 Wyeth Anti-rapamycin monoclonal antibodies
US5562907A (en) 1993-05-14 1996-10-08 Arnon; Stephen S. Method to prevent side-effects and insensitivity to the therapeutic uses of toxins
US5391730A (en) 1993-10-08 1995-02-21 American Home Products Corporation Phosphorylcarbamates of rapamycin and oxime derivatives thereof
US5385909A (en) 1993-11-22 1995-01-31 American Home Products Corporation Heterocyclic esters of rapamycin
US5385910A (en) 1993-11-22 1995-01-31 American Home Products Corporation Gem-distributed esters of rapamycin
US5385908A (en) 1993-11-22 1995-01-31 American Home Products Corporation Hindered esters of rapamycin
US5389639A (en) 1993-12-29 1995-02-14 American Home Products Company Amino alkanoic esters of rapamycin
US5417982A (en) 1994-02-17 1995-05-23 Modi; Pankaj Controlled release of drugs or hormones in biodegradable polymer microspheres
IL112873A (en) 1994-03-08 2005-03-20 Wyeth Corp Rapamycin-fkbp12 binding proteins, their isolation and their use
US6171859B1 (en) 1994-03-30 2001-01-09 Mitokor Method of targeting conjugate molecules to mitochondria
US5362718A (en) 1994-04-18 1994-11-08 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin hydroxyesters
US5463048A (en) 1994-06-14 1995-10-31 American Home Products Corporation Rapamycin amidino carbamates
US5491231A (en) 1994-11-28 1996-02-13 American Home Products Corporation Hindered N-oxide esters of rapamycin
US5547668A (en) 1995-05-05 1996-08-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois Conjugates of folate anti-effector cell antibodies
AUPN449295A0 (en) 1995-07-28 1995-08-24 Inner And Eastern Health Care Network, The Radioprotectors
US6207157B1 (en) 1996-04-23 2001-03-27 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Conjugate vaccine for nontypeable Haemophilus influenzae
US6030941A (en) 1996-05-01 2000-02-29 Avi Biopharma, Inc. Polymer composition for delivering substances in living organisms
AU717020B2 (en) 1996-05-03 2000-03-16 Immunomedics Inc. Targeted combination immunotherapy of cancer
DE19621133A1 (en) 1996-05-24 1997-11-27 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Determination method with oligomerized receptors
ES2244006T3 (en) 1996-08-27 2005-12-01 University Of Utah Research Foundation BIOCONJUGADOS AND ADMINISTRATION OF BIOACTIVE AGENTS.
EP0926955A4 (en) 1996-09-12 2003-05-07 Merck & Co Inc Conjugates useful in the treatment of prostate cancer
US6056973A (en) 1996-10-11 2000-05-02 Sequus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic liposome composition and method of preparation
US6071532A (en) 1996-10-15 2000-06-06 Emory University Synthesis of glycophospholipid and peptide-phospholipid conjugates and uses thereof
US6177404B1 (en) 1996-10-15 2001-01-23 Merck & Co., Inc. Conjugates useful in the treatment of benign prostatic hyperplasia
US6291673B1 (en) 1997-10-17 2001-09-18 Purdue Research Foundation Folic acid derivatives
GB9723669D0 (en) 1997-11-07 1998-01-07 Univ Aberdeen Skin penetration enhancing components
US6399638B1 (en) 1998-04-21 2002-06-04 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company 12,13-modified epothilone derivatives
US6093382A (en) 1998-05-16 2000-07-25 Bracco Research Usa Inc. Metal complexes derivatized with folate for use in diagnostic and therapeutic applications
ATE473759T1 (en) 1998-05-22 2010-07-15 Univ Leland Stanford Junior BIFUNCTIONAL MOLECULES AND THERAPIES BASED THERAPIES.
US6974581B1 (en) 1998-12-15 2005-12-13 Aventis Pasteur Limited Multi-component vaccine comprising at least two antigens from haemophilus influenzae to protect against disease
US6291684B1 (en) 1999-03-29 2001-09-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process for the preparation of aziridinyl epothilones from oxiranyl epothilones
CA2369595C (en) 1999-04-23 2010-10-05 Alza Corporation Conjugate having a cleavable linkage for use in a liposome
AUPQ014799A0 (en) 1999-05-04 1999-05-27 Access Pharmaceuticals Australia Pty Limited Amplification of folate-mediated targeting to tumor cells using polymers
AUPQ071299A0 (en) 1999-06-02 1999-06-24 Access Pharmaceuticals Australia Pty Limited Vitamin directed dual targeting therapy
US6822086B1 (en) 1999-08-09 2004-11-23 The General Hospital Corporation Drug-carrier complexes and methods of use thereof
EP1210121A2 (en) 1999-08-24 2002-06-05 Cellgate Inc. Enhancing drug delivery across and into epithelial tissues using oligo arginine moieties
WO2001028592A1 (en) 1999-10-15 2001-04-26 Mayo Foundation For Medical Education And Research Cobalamin conjugates useful as imaging agents and as antitumor agents
US7067111B1 (en) 1999-10-25 2006-06-27 Board Of Regents, University Of Texas System Ethylenedicysteine (EC)-drug conjugates, compositions and methods for tissue specific disease imaging
WO2001038318A1 (en) 1999-11-24 2001-05-31 Immunogen, Inc. Cytotoxic agents comprising taxanes and their therapeutic use
KR100863632B1 (en) 2000-03-31 2008-10-15 퍼듀 리서치 파운데이션 Method of treatment using ligand-immunogen conjugates
GB0008090D0 (en) 2000-04-04 2000-05-24 Morgan Samuels Limited Trouser waist adjuster
US6670355B2 (en) 2000-06-16 2003-12-30 Wyeth Method of treating cardiovascular disease
US6290929B1 (en) 2000-07-28 2001-09-18 The Procter & Gamble Company Cancer treatment
DE60106281T2 (en) 2000-08-11 2005-02-24 Wyeth A method of treating an estrogen receptor positive carcinoma
EP1319008B1 (en) 2000-09-19 2008-10-15 Wyeth Water soluble rapamycin esters
US6399625B1 (en) 2000-09-27 2002-06-04 Wyeth 1-oxorapamycins
US6440991B1 (en) 2000-10-02 2002-08-27 Wyeth Ethers of 7-desmethlrapamycin
US6399626B1 (en) 2000-10-02 2002-06-04 Wyeth Hydroxyesters of 7-desmethylrapamycin
IL155952A0 (en) 2000-11-28 2003-12-23 Wyeth Corp Expression analysis of fkbp nucleic acids and polypeptides useful in the diagnosis and treatment of prostate cancer
US20020168737A1 (en) 2001-01-24 2002-11-14 Cornish Virginia W. Binding and catalysis screen for high throughput determination of protein function using chemical inducers of dimerization
AR036993A1 (en) 2001-04-02 2004-10-20 Wyeth Corp USE OF AGENTS THAT MODULATE THE INTERACTION BETWEEN PD-1 AND ITS LINKS IN THE SUBMODULATION OF IMMUNOLOGICAL ANSWERS
JP2004533226A (en) 2001-04-02 2004-11-04 ワイス PD-1, A receptor for B7-4 and uses thereof
ATE427948T1 (en) 2001-04-24 2009-04-15 Purdue Research Foundation FOLATE MIMETICS AND THEIR FOLATE RECEPTOR-BINDING CONJUGATES
RU2316349C2 (en) 2001-05-02 2008-02-10 Пердью Рисерч Фаундейшн Treatment and diagnosis of macrophage mediated diseases
US7109165B2 (en) 2001-05-18 2006-09-19 Sirna Therapeutics, Inc. Conjugates and compositions for cellular delivery
JP2004532888A (en) 2001-06-01 2004-10-28 ブリストル−マイヤーズ　スクイブ　カンパニー Epothilone derivative
US20040018203A1 (en) 2001-06-08 2004-01-29 Ira Pastan Pegylation of linkers improves antitumor activity and reduces toxicity of immunoconjugates
UA77200C2 (en) 2001-08-07 2006-11-15 Wyeth Corp Antineoplastic combination of cci-779 and bkb-569
EP1419153A1 (en) 2001-08-22 2004-05-19 Wyeth Rapamycin dialdehydes
EP1419154B1 (en) 2001-08-22 2005-10-05 Wyeth Rapamycin 29-enols
EP1434603B1 (en) 2001-09-28 2009-12-16 Purdue Research Foundation Method of treatment using ligand-immunogen conjugates
GR1004163B (en) 2001-11-01 2003-02-21 Polycarbocyclic derivatives for modification of resist, optical and etch resistance properties
WO2003050295A2 (en) 2001-12-12 2003-06-19 Conforma Therapeutics Corporation Assays and implements for determining and modulating hsp90 binding activity
US20030194409A1 (en) 2002-01-17 2003-10-16 Rothman James E. Conjugate heat shock protein-binding peptides
US8043602B2 (en) 2002-02-07 2011-10-25 Endocyte, Inc. Folate targeted enhanced tumor and folate receptor positive tissue optical imaging technology
US7000695B2 (en) 2002-05-02 2006-02-21 Halliburton Energy Services, Inc. Expanding wellbore junction
CN100528241C (en) 2002-05-06 2009-08-19 恩多塞特公司 Vitamin-targeted imaging agents
US6596757B1 (en) 2002-05-14 2003-07-22 Immunogen Inc. Cytotoxic agents comprising polyethylene glycol-containing taxanes and their therapeutic use
ES2324708T3 (en) 2002-05-15 2009-08-13 Endocyte, Inc. VITAMIN-MYTHOMYCIN CONJUGATES.
AU2003253048A1 (en) 2002-07-09 2004-01-23 Morphochem Aktiengellschaft Fur Kombinatorische Chemie Tubulysin conjugates
WO2004005327A1 (en) 2002-07-09 2004-01-15 Morphochem Ag Komb Chemie Novel tubulysin analogues
JP2006505627A (en) 2002-07-31 2006-02-16 シエーリング アクチエンゲゼルシャフト Novel effector conjugates, methods for their production and their pharmaceutical use
DE10241152A1 (en) 2002-09-05 2004-03-18 GESELLSCHAFT FüR BIOTECHNOLOGISCHE FORSCHUNG MBH (GBF) Tubulysin biosynthesis genes
US20040047917A1 (en) 2002-09-06 2004-03-11 Stephen Wilson Drug delivery and targeting with vitamin B12 conjugates
CN102516417B (en) 2002-09-06 2014-12-10 天蓝制药公司 Cyclodextrin-based polymers for therapeutics delivery
CA2501752A1 (en) 2002-10-10 2004-04-22 Wyeth Compositions, organisms and methodologies employing a novel human kinase
AU2003286705A1 (en) 2002-10-24 2004-05-13 Research Corporation Technologies Functional mri agents for cancer imaging
CA2506633A1 (en) 2002-11-21 2004-06-10 Wyeth Composition and method for treating lupus nephritis
JP4959136B2 (en) 2002-12-13 2012-06-20 イミューノメディクス、インコーポレイテッド Immunoconjugates with cleavable linkages in cells
US7601332B2 (en) 2003-01-27 2009-10-13 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor binding drug delivery conjugates
AR042938A1 (en) 2003-02-06 2005-07-06 Wyeth Corp USE OF CCI-779 IN THE TREATMENT OF HEPATIC FIBROSIS
EP2666858A1 (en) 2003-04-17 2013-11-27 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc. Modified iRNA agents
WO2004101803A2 (en) 2003-05-12 2004-11-25 Wyeth Holdings Corporation Process for producing anticancer agent ll-d45042
CA2528173A1 (en) 2003-07-16 2005-02-03 Wyeth Cci-779 isomer c
DK1658295T3 (en) 2003-08-07 2007-09-24 Wyeth Corp Regioselective synthesis of CCI-779
DE602005003453T2 (en) 2004-01-30 2008-09-25 Bayer Schering Pharma Aktiengesellschaft NEW EFFECTOR CONJUGATES, PROCESS FOR THEIR MANUFACTURE AND THEIR PHARMACEUTICAL USE
US20060105975A1 (en) 2004-04-19 2006-05-18 Shannon Pendergrast Aptamer-mediated intracellular delivery of therapeutic oligonucleotides
EP1747021B1 (en) 2004-05-19 2015-09-09 E. R. Squibb & Sons, L.L.C. Self-immolative linkers and drug conjugates
WO2005115912A1 (en) 2004-05-25 2005-12-08 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Hydrogen production apparatus and fuel cell system using the same
EP1789391B1 (en) 2004-07-23 2017-06-28 Endocyte, Inc. Bivalent linkers and conjugates thereof
EP2990410A1 (en) 2004-08-10 2016-03-02 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals Inc. Chemically modified oligonucleotides
CN101438252A (en) 2004-10-07 2009-05-20 爱莫里大学 Multifunctional nanoparticle conjugates and their use
US20060222653A1 (en) 2004-11-12 2006-10-05 Xencor, Inc. Antibodies operably linked to selected chemoattractants
US20110166319A1 (en) 2005-02-11 2011-07-07 Immunogen, Inc. Process for preparing purified drug conjugates
TW200640493A (en) 2005-02-16 2006-12-01 Insert Therapeutics Inc Cyclodextrin-based polymers for therapeutics delivery
US7312217B2 (en) 2005-03-11 2007-12-25 Syntrix Biosystems, Inc. Aminopterin dosage forms and methods for inflammatory disorders
EP1863816B1 (en) 2005-03-16 2014-06-25 Endocyte, Inc. Synthesis and purification of pteroic acid and conjugates thereof
CA2602585A1 (en) 2005-03-30 2006-10-05 Purdue Research Foundation Method for cancer prognosis using cellular folate vitamin receptor quantification
CN103127523A (en) 2005-06-20 2013-06-05 Psma开发有限公司 Psma antibody-drug conjugates
EP1904183B1 (en) 2005-07-05 2014-10-15 Purdue Research Foundation Pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of osteoarthritis
EP1948241B1 (en) 2005-08-19 2014-03-05 Endocyte, Inc. Multi-drug ligand conjugates
WO2007022493A2 (en) 2005-08-19 2007-02-22 Endocyte, Inc. Ligand conjugates of vinca alkaloids, analogs, and derivatives
EP1937719A4 (en) 2005-08-19 2010-11-24 Novo Nordisk As Glycopegylated factor vii and factor viia
EP1928503B1 (en) 2005-08-24 2012-10-03 ImmunoGen, Inc. Process for preparing maytansinoid antibody conjugates
WO2008048298A2 (en) 2005-11-21 2008-04-24 Medivas, Llc Polymer particles for delivery of macromolecules and methods of use
AR062448A1 (en) 2006-05-25 2008-11-12 Endocyte Inc CONJUGATES OF ANALOGS OF AZIRIDINIL-EPOTILONE AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS THAT INCLUDE THE SAME
WO2008057437A2 (en) 2006-11-03 2008-05-15 Purdue Research Foundation Ex vivo flow cytometry method and device
US20080176958A1 (en) 2007-01-24 2008-07-24 Insert Therapeutics, Inc. Cyclodextrin-based polymers for therapeutics delivery
US20100104626A1 (en) 2007-02-16 2010-04-29 Endocyte, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating and diagnosing kidney disease
AU2008224988A1 (en) * 2007-03-14 2008-09-18 Endocyte, Inc. Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins
US8980833B2 (en) 2007-05-10 2015-03-17 R&D-Biopharmaceuticals Gmbh Tubulysine derivatives
US9138484B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2015-09-22 Endocyte, Inc. Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
WO2009134279A1 (en) 2007-07-20 2009-11-05 The Regents Of The University Of California Tubulysin d analogues
US9193763B2 (en) 2007-08-17 2015-11-24 Purdue Research Foundation PSMA binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
CA2703491C (en) 2007-10-25 2017-06-13 Endocyte, Inc. Tubulysins and processes for preparing
CA2708171C (en) 2007-12-04 2018-02-27 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Folate conjugates
SG189817A1 (en) 2008-04-30 2013-05-31 Immunogen Inc Potent conjugates and hydrophilic linkers
US20100040669A1 (en) 2008-08-12 2010-02-18 Higuchi John W Non-Invasive Ocular Delivery of Rapamycin
US20100074863A1 (en) 2008-09-17 2010-03-25 Yat Sun Or Anti-infective pyrrolidine derivatives and analogs
US8546425B2 (en) 2008-09-17 2013-10-01 Purdue Research Foundation Folate receptor binding conjugates of antifolates
EP2174947A1 (en) 2008-09-25 2010-04-14 Universität des Saarlandes Bioactive pre-tubulysins and use thereof
WO2010045584A1 (en) 2008-10-17 2010-04-22 Endocyte, Inc. Folate targeting of nucleotides
US20110288152A1 (en) 2008-10-17 2011-11-24 Purdue Research Foundation Psma binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
IT1394860B1 (en) 2009-07-22 2012-07-20 Kemotech S R L PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOUNDS
US8394922B2 (en) 2009-08-03 2013-03-12 Medarex, Inc. Antiproliferative compounds, conjugates thereof, methods therefor, and uses thereof
CN102648208B (en) 2009-11-12 2016-04-27 R&D生技药品有限责任公司 Antitubulin
EP2322537A1 (en) 2009-11-12 2011-05-18 R & D Biopharmaceuticals Gmbh Tubulin inhibitors
EP2515651A4 (en) 2009-12-23 2016-01-13 Endocyte Inc Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
JP5972864B2 (en) 2010-04-15 2016-08-17 メディミューン リミテッド Pyrrolobenzodiazepines and their conjugates
EP2409983A1 (en) 2010-07-19 2012-01-25 Leibniz-Institut für Pflanzenbiochemie (IPB) Tubulysin analogues
US20130203680A1 (en) 2010-09-27 2013-08-08 Endocyte, Inc. Folate conjugates for treating inflammation of the eye
KR20220123130A (en) 2011-03-29 2022-09-05 이뮤노젠 아이엔씨 Preparation of maytansinoid antibody conjugates by a one-step process
EA025786B1 (en) 2011-03-29 2017-01-30 Иммуноджен, Инк. Process for manufacturing conjugates of improved homogeneity
EA029797B1 (en) 2011-06-21 2018-05-31 Иммуноджен, Инк. Novel maytansinoid derivatives with peptide linker and conjugates thereof
JP2015500287A (en) 2011-12-05 2015-01-05 アイジェニカ・バイオセラピューティクス・インコーポレイテッドＩｇｅｎｉｃａ Ｂｉｏｔｈｅｒａｐｅｕｔｉｃｓ，Ｉｎｃ． Antibody-drug conjugates and related compounds, compositions and methods
WO2013126797A1 (en) 2012-02-24 2013-08-29 Purdue Research Foundation Cholecystokinin b receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
EP2822386B1 (en) 2012-02-29 2021-05-05 Purdue Research Foundation Folate receptor alpha binding ligands
US20140080175A1 (en) 2012-03-29 2014-03-20 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof
WO2013170272A2 (en) 2012-05-11 2013-11-14 Alexander Krantz Site-specific labeling and targeted delivery of proteins for the treatment of cancer
JP6239597B2 (en) 2012-05-15 2017-11-29 ソレント・セラピューティクス・インコーポレイテッドＳｏｒｒｅｎｔｏ Ｔｈｅｒａｐｅｕｔｉｃｓ， Ｉｎｃ． Drug conjugate, conjugation method and use thereof
AU2012385228B2 (en) 2012-07-12 2016-10-06 Hangzhou Dac Biotech Co., Ltd Conjugates of cell binding molecules with cytotoxic agents
EP2708243A1 (en) 2012-09-17 2014-03-19 OntoChem GmbH Receptor ligand linked cytotoxic molecules
SG11201502896XA (en) 2012-10-16 2015-05-28 Endocyte Inc Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
US20140107316A1 (en) 2012-10-16 2014-04-17 Endocyte, Inc. Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
EA201890915A1 (en) 2012-11-15 2018-09-28 Эндосайт, Инк. CONJUGATES FOR DELIVERY OF MEDICINES AND METHODS OF TREATMENT OF DISEASES CAUSED BY CELLS EXPRESSING PSMA
WO2014080251A1 (en) 2012-11-24 2014-05-30 Hangzhou Dac Biotech Co., Ltd. Hydrophilic linkers and their uses for conjugation of drugs to cell binding molecules
MY169117A (en) 2012-12-21 2019-02-18 Bioalliance Cv Hydrophilic self-immolative linkers and conjugates thereof
DK2956173T3 (en) 2013-02-14 2017-07-17 Bristol Myers Squibb Co TUBULYSIS RELATIONSHIPS, METHODS OF PRODUCING AND USING THEREOF
US20140249315A1 (en) 2013-03-01 2014-09-04 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysins
CN109316605B (en) 2014-01-20 2023-07-14 博瑞生物医药（苏州）股份有限公司 Folate receptor binding ligand-drug conjugates

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060128754A1 (en) * 2002-11-21 2006-06-15 Gerhard Hoefle Tubulysins, method for producing the same and tubulysin preparations
WO2011069116A1 (en) * 2009-12-04 2011-06-09 Endocyte, Inc. Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins
WO2011106639A1 (en) * 2010-02-25 2011-09-01 Purdue Research Foundation Psma binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
WO2012019123A1 (en) * 2010-08-06 2012-02-09 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysins

Cited By (31)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9550734B2 (en) 2004-07-23 2017-01-24 Endocyte, Inc. Bivalent linkers and conjugates thereof
US10647676B2 (en) 2004-07-23 2020-05-12 Endocyte, Inc. Bivalent linkers and conjugates thereof
US9555139B2 (en) 2007-03-14 2017-01-31 Endocyte, Inc. Binding ligand linked drug delivery conjugates of tubulysins
US9877965B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2018-01-30 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
US10738086B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2020-08-11 Endocyte Inc. Conjugates containing hydrophilic spacer linkers
US10500204B2 (en) 2007-06-25 2019-12-10 Endocyte, Inc. Vitamin receptor drug delivery conjugates for treating inflammation
US10080805B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2018-09-25 Purdue Research Foundation Cholecystokinin B receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
US11344623B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2022-05-31 Purdue Research Foundation Cholecystokinin B receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
US10765756B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2020-09-08 Purdue Research Foundation Cholecystokinin B receptor targeting for imaging and therapy
US9505747B2 (en) 2012-03-29 2016-11-29 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof
US9662402B2 (en) 2012-10-16 2017-05-30 Endocyte, Inc. Drug delivery conjugates containing unnatural amino acids and methods for using
EP3875082A1 (en) 2012-11-15 2021-09-08 Endocyte, Inc. Conjugates for treating diseases caused by psma expressing cells
EP3858341A1 (en) 2012-11-15 2021-08-04 Endocyte, Inc. Psma ligand-containing conjugates for the treatment of prostate cancer
US9771391B2 (en) 2013-03-01 2017-09-26 Endocyte, Inc. Process for preparing tubulysins
WO2014134543A1 (en) * 2013-03-01 2014-09-04 Endocyte, Inc. Processes for preparing tubulysins
CN106132959A (en) * 2014-01-28 2016-11-16 管道制药有限责任公司 For the cytotoxicity tubulysin compound puted together
US10889616B2 (en) 2014-01-28 2021-01-12 Tube Pharmaceuticals Gmbh Cytotoxic tubulysin compounds for conjugation
US10183970B2 (en) 2014-01-28 2019-01-22 Tube Pharmaceuticals Gmbh Cytotoxic tubulysin compounds for conjugation
AU2015213106B2 (en) * 2014-01-28 2019-07-25 Tube Pharmaceuticals Gmbh Cytotoxic tubulysin compounds for conjugation
JP2017507926A (en) * 2014-01-28 2017-03-23 トゥーベ・ファルマシューティカルズ・ゲー・エム・ベー・ハー Novel cytotoxic tubulin compounds for conjugation
WO2015113760A1 (en) * 2014-01-28 2015-08-06 Tube Pharmaceuticals Gmbh Cytotoxic tubulysin compounds for conjugation
CN106456796A (en) * 2014-04-14 2017-02-22 恩多塞特公司 Drug delivery conjugates for treating resistant cancer and for use in combination therapy
WO2015160833A1 (en) * 2014-04-14 2015-10-22 Endocyte, Inc. Drug delivery conjugates for treating resistant cancer and for use in combination therapy
JP2017533887A (en) * 2014-09-17 2017-11-16 ジェネンテック， インコーポレイテッド Pyrrolobenzodiazepines and their antibody disulfide conjugates
US10808007B2 (en) 2015-02-25 2020-10-20 William Marsh Rice University Desacetoxytubulysin H and analogs thereof
EP3261443A4 (en) * 2015-02-25 2018-09-26 William Marsh Rice University Desacetoxytubulysin h and analogs thereof
CN107529754A (en) * 2015-02-25 2018-01-02 威廉马歇莱思大学 Remove acetoxyl group tubulysin H and the like
WO2016138288A1 (en) 2015-02-25 2016-09-01 William Marsh Rice University Desacetoxytubulysin h and analogs thereof
US11229708B2 (en) 2015-12-04 2022-01-25 Seagen Inc. Conjugates of quaternized tubulysin compounds
US11793880B2 (en) 2015-12-04 2023-10-24 Seagen Inc. Conjugates of quaternized tubulysin compounds
US11274124B2 (en) 2017-11-29 2022-03-15 William Marsh Rice University Tubulysin analogues as anticancer agents and payloads for antibody-drug conjugates and methods of treatment therewith

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP2831059B1 (en) 2017-11-29
CA2868494A1 (en) 2013-10-03
US9505747B2 (en) 2016-11-29
EP2831059A1 (en) 2015-02-04
US20140080175A1 (en) 2014-03-20
JP2015518473A (en) 2015-07-02
EP2831059A4 (en) 2015-09-02
US20150051399A1 (en) 2015-02-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2831059B1 (en) Processes for preparing tubulysin derivatives and conjugates thereof
US9499849B2 (en) Processes for preparing tubulysins
EP2961764A1 (en) Processes for preparing tubulysins
AU2022200353A1 (en) Targeted therapeutics
DE69130408T2 (en) Endothelin antagonistic peptide derivatives
FI115770B (en) Process for the preparation of pharmacologically active peptide derivatives
EP1853603A1 (en) Peptidomimetic compounds and preparation of biologically active derivatives
DE69610145T2 (en) Benzo-condensed azepinone and piperidinone compounds, useful as ACE and NEP inhibitors
US9200034B2 (en) Oligopeptides and process for preparation thereof
CN110325527B (en) Sulfonamides as inhibitors of extracellular citrate uptake
US6642253B2 (en) Thrombin inhibitors comprising an aminoisoquinoline group
AU2018363696A1 (en) Method for the synthesis of cyclic depsipeptides
AU2013203491A1 (en) Processes for preparing tubulysins
JP2002539132A (en) Method for producing 20- (S) -camptothecin sugar-conjugate
KR100965247B1 (en) Novel arylsulfonylimidazolone derivatives and an anti-cancer pharmaceutical composition comprising the same
JPH08109180A (en) Acyl group intramolecular shifting (o to n)-type prodrug
CA2049390A1 (en) Novel peptide derivatives and their pharmaceutical use

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 13770372

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2868494

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 14388311

Country of ref document: US

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2015503659

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

REEP Request for entry into the european phase

Ref document number: 2013770372

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2013770372

Country of ref document: EP